User Manual

SMP Gateway
For use with SMP Gateway software version 6.3 or later.
Cooper Power Systems, SMP and Yukon are valuable trademarks of Cooper Industries.
All brand and product names appearing in this document are the trademark or registered trademark
of their respective holders.

© 2013 Cooper Power Systems, LLC – All rights reserved.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Cooper Power Systems

Energy Automation Solutions
730 Commerciale Street
Suite 200
Saint-Jean-Chrysostome, Quebec
Canada G6Z 2C5
Phone: +1.418.834.0009
Fax: +1.514.227.5256
Email: [email protected]
Web: http://www.cooperpower.com

Technical Support: [email protected]

S1120-10-1, version 27
 Contents
1 Welcome 1
1.1 SMP Gateway Models ...........................................................................................1
1.2 Related Documentation .........................................................................................2
1.3 Getting Assistance .................................................................................................2
1.4 Getting Started .......................................................................................................2
1.5 Overview ...............................................................................................................3

2 Principles of Operation 5
2.1 Logical Architecture ..............................................................................................5
2.1.1 Masters and Slaves ..................................................................................5
2.1.2 Introducing the SMP Gateway in the Automation System......................6
2.1.3 SMP Gateway Internals ...........................................................................6
2.1.4 Communications Components ................................................................7
2.2 Configuring the SMP Gateway..............................................................................8
2.2.1 The Transparent SMP Gateway ..............................................................9
2.2.2 Using the SMP Gateway as a Protocol Translator ................................ 11
2.2.3 Using the SMP Gateway as a Data Concentrator .................................. 12
2.2.4 Using the SMP Gateway as a Communication Processor ..................... 13
2.2.5 Putting It All Together .......................................................................... 14
2.2.6 Securing the Substation ......................................................................... 15

3 SMP Tools Overview 17

4 SMP Manager 19
4.1 Main Window ...................................................................................................... 19
4.2 Adding an SMP Gateway .................................................................................... 20
4.3 Information Provided by the SMP Gateway Icon ................................................ 21
4.4 Customizing the Display ..................................................................................... 22
4.4.1 Adding or Removing a Column ............................................................ 23
4.4.2 Changing the Position of a Column ...................................................... 23

5 Configuring the SMP Gateway 25

5.1 Creating Master Protocol Instances ..................................................................... 26

SMP Gateway User Manual •i

 5.1.1 Device Prefix and Naming Conventions for Data Points ...................... 28
5.1.2 Configuring the Master Protocol General Settings ............................... 28
5.1.3 Accessing Protocol-Specific Documentation ........................................ 29
5.2 Configuring the Data Points ................................................................................ 29
5.2.1 Adding Data Points from a Protocol Template ..................................... 31
5.3 Creating a Template from a Master Protocol Instance ........................................ 31
5.4 Duplicating a Master Protocol Instance ............................................................... 31
5.5 Configuring the Communications Links ............................................................. 32
5.5.1 Configuring the Serial Port Interfaces ................................................... 32
5.5.2 Serial port naming conventions ............................................................. 33
5.5.3 Configuring the Operation of the Serial Ports ....................................... 34
5.5.4 Reserving a Serial Port for Radio Usage ............................................... 35
5.5.5 Configuring TCP/IP Master Connections ............................................. 36
5.5.6 Configuring UDP/IP Master Connections ............................................. 37
5.6 Associating a Master Protocol Instance with a Communications Link ............... 37
5.7 Validating and Saving the Configuration ............................................................ 38
5.7.1 Sending the Configuration to the SMP Gateway .................................. 39
5.7.2 Retrieving an SMP Gateway Configuration File................................... 39
5.8 Working with SMP Config .................................................................................. 40
5.8.1 Selecting Cells and Rows ...................................................................... 40
5.8.2 Duplicating a Row................................................................................. 40
5.8.3 Copying a Value to a Group of Cells .................................................... 40
5.8.4 Re-sequencing a Group of Rows ........................................................... 41
5.8.5 Deleting an Item .................................................................................... 43
5.8.6 Using Tooltips ....................................................................................... 43
5.8.7 Searching and Replacing Points in a Configuration .............................. 43

6 Viewing the SMP Log Files 45

6.1 Information Provided by SMP Log ..................................................................... 45
6.2 SMP Log Features ............................................................................................... 46
6.2.1 Searching in SMP Log .......................................................................... 46
6.2.2 Printing a Log ........................................................................................ 46
6.2.3 Saving a Log File .................................................................................. 46
6.2.4 Viewing Multiple Log Folders at Once ................................................. 46
6.2.5 Changing How Time Information is Displayed .................................... 47
6.2.6 Deactivating the Auto Scroll Feature .................................................... 47
6.2.7 Log Retrieval by Scripting .................................................................... 47

ii • Contents
 7 Viewing Protocol Exchanges in Real Time 49
7.1 Information Provided by SMP Trace................................................................... 49
7.2 SMP Trace Features ............................................................................................ 50
7.2.1 Searching in SMP Trace........................................................................ 50
7.2.2 Printing Traces ...................................................................................... 51
7.2.3 Recording Live Traces .......................................................................... 51
7.2.4 Saving all the Scrolled Information....................................................... 51
7.2.5 Changing How Time Information is Displayed .................................... 52
7.2.6 Deactivating the Auto Scroll Feature .................................................... 52

8 Viewing Communications Statistics in Real Time 53

8.1 Information Provided by SMP Stats .................................................................... 54
8.2 SMP Stats Features .............................................................................................. 54
8.2.1 Resetting Statistics ................................................................................ 54
8.2.2 Printing Statistics .................................................................................. 54
8.2.3 Changing How Time Information is Displayed .................................... 55

9 Using a Web Browser to View Data in Real Time 57

9.1 Connecting to the SMP Gateway Website........................................................... 57
9.2 Navigating Through the SMP Gateway Website ................................................. 57
9.3 Applying a Filter to a Data Point Display ........................................................... 58
9.4 Acknowledging Data Point Value Changes ........................................................ 59

10 Connecting the SMP Gateway to a Control Center 61

10.1 Creating Slave Protocol Instances ....................................................................... 61
10.2 Configuring Slave Protocol Instances ................................................................. 61
10.3 Subscribing to the Master Data Points................................................................. 62
10.4 Configuring the Data Points ................................................................................ 64
10.5 Configuring the Communications Links ............................................................. 64
10.5.1 Setting up a TCP/IP Slave Connection.................................................. 64
10.5.2 Setting up a UDP/IP Slave Connection ................................................. 65
10.6 Associating a Slave Protocol Instance with a Communications Link ................. 66
10.7 Validating and Activating the Configuration ...................................................... 67
10.8 Testing the Configuration .................................................................................... 67

11 Using the Web Server Commissioning Tool 69

11.1 Configuring an SMP Gateway for Commissioning ............................................. 69
11.2 Activating the Commissioning Feature ............................................................... 70
11.3 Starting a Commissioning Session ...................................................................... 70

SMP Gateway User Manual • iii

 11.3.1 The Commissioning Tab ....................................................................... 71
11.3.2 Forcing an Input Point ........................................................................... 72
11.3.3 Reverting an Input Point to its Current Value ....................................... 72
11.3.4 Performing a Control Operation ............................................................ 73
11.3.5 Closing the Commissioning Session ..................................................... 74
11.4 Deactivating the Commissioning Feature ............................................................ 74

12 Data Monitoring and Control through the SMP Gateway

HMI 77
12.1 The SMP Gateway HMI ...................................................................................... 77
12.2 SMP Gateway HMI Display Options .................................................................. 77
12.3 SMP Gateway HMI Requirements ...................................................................... 78
12.3.1 Specific SMP Gateway Requirements for the Touchscreen .................. 78
12.4 Setting Up the Touch Screen for SMP Gateway HMI Local Display ................. 78
12.4.1 Touch Screen Calibration for the SMP Gateway HMI.......................... 79
12.4.2 SMP Gateway HMI Local Display Mouse Support .............................. 79
12.5 SMP Gateway Single-Line Diagram Creation using Visual T&D Diagram
Editor ................................................................................................................... 79
12.6 Uploading an SMP Gateway HMI Package File on the SMP Gateway .............. 79
12.7 Accessing the SMP Gateway Single-Line Diagram Remotely............................ 80
12.8 Accessing the SMP Gateway Annunciator .......................................................... 80
12.9 Viewing the SMP Gateway Control Log ............................................................. 80
12.10 Control Interlock through the SMP Gateway HMI ............................................. 80
12.11 Changing SMP Gateway HMI Display Language ............................................... 81

13 Security 83
13.1 Meeting NERC CIP Requirements ...................................................................... 83
13.1.1 Displaying Appropriate Use Banners .................................................... 83
13.1.2 Identifying Which Ports are Open in the SMP Gateway Firewall ......... 85
13.2 Substation Network Security Considerations ...................................................... 85
13.2.1 The SMP Gateway Integrated Firewall ................................................. 85
13.2.2 Using SMP Tools through a Substation LAN Firewall ......................... 86
13.3 Extending the SMP Gateway Security Model ..................................................... 86
13.4 SMP Gateway Authentication Policy .................................................................. 87
13.4.1 Defining the SMP Gateway Authentication Policy ............................... 87
13.5 Changing the Current Login in SMP Manager .................................................... 88
13.6 The SMP Gateway Security Database ................................................................. 89
13.6.1 Default Groups and Privileges .............................................................. 89

iv • Contents
 13.6.2 Accessing the Local Security Database Editor ...................................... 90
13.6.3 Managing the List of User Groups ........................................................ 91
13.6.4 Granting Privileges to a User Group ..................................................... 91
13.6.5 Managing the List of User Accounts ..................................................... 92
13.6.6 Setting the Password of a User Account ............................................... 92
13.6.7 Assigning a User Account to Groups .................................................... 92
13.6.8 Validating the Local Security Database ................................................ 93
13.6.9 The SMP Gateway Security Database Status ........................................ 93
13.6.10 Uploading the Local Security Database on SMP Gateways .................. 94
13.6.11 Retrieving an Existing Security Database from an SMP Gateway........ 94
13.6.12 Exporting the Local Security Database ................................................. 95
13.6.13 Uploading a Previously Saved Security Database................................. 95
13.6.14 Deactivating Local Authentication on SMP Gateways ......................... 95
13.7 User Account Lockout ......................................................................................... 96
13.7.1 Unlocking User Accounts ..................................................................... 96
13.8 The SMP Gateway Security Log ......................................................................... 97
13.8.1 Viewing the Security Log ..................................................................... 97
13.9 File Certification and Integrity Checking ............................................................ 97
13.9.1 Detecting an Integrity Check Failure .................................................... 97
13.9.2 Recovering from an Integrity Failure .................................................... 98
13.10 Configuring the Integrated Firewall .................................................................... 98
13.10.1 Specifying Firewall Rules ..................................................................... 98
13.10.2 Restricting Access to Other Services .................................................. 100
13.10.3 Deactivating the Integrated Firewall ................................................... 100
13.10.4 Disabling the Firewall Log .................................................................. 100
13.11 Device Account Password Management ........................................................... 101
13.11.1 The SMP Gateway Password Secure Store ......................................... 101
13.11.2 Updating an Account Password in the SMP Gateway Secure Store ... 101
13.11.3 Deleting an Account Password from the SMP Gateway Secure
Store 102
13.12 Locking Passthrough and Incoming RAS Connections ..................................... 103
13.12.1 Locking or Unlocking a Passthrough Connection ............................... 103
13.12.2 Locking or Unlocking All Incoming RAS Dialup Connections .......... 104
13.13 Security-Related System Data Points ................................................................ 104
13.14 Legacy SMP Gateway Software and Tools Compatibility ................................ 104
13.14.1 Accessing SMP Gateways with Legacy Software Installed ................ 105
13.14.2 Using Legacy SMP Tools with Recent SMP Gateway Software ........ 106

SMP Gateway User Manual •v

 13.14.3 Using Recent SMP Tools with Legacy SMP Gateway Software ........ 106
13.14.4 Using VPN Connections ..................................................................... 107
13.14.4.1 Manually Setting Up a VPN Connection .......................... 107

14 Using Passthrough Connections 109

14.1 Principles of Operation ...................................................................................... 109
14.1.1 The Direct Access Port and the Command Line Interface .................. 111
14.2 Setting up Passthrough Connections ................................................................. 111
14.2.1 Defining SMP Gateway Passthrough Settings .................................... 111
14.2.2 Installing a Loopback Cable, if Necessary .......................................... 113
14.2.3 Setting Up a List of Applications and Loopback Connections............ 114
14.3 Connecting to the Device .................................................................................. 116
14.4 Testing the Passthrough Connection ................................................................. 116
14.5 Deactivating the Passthrough Connection ......................................................... 117
14.6 Using the Trace of Passthrough Connection Events .......................................... 117
14.7 Changing How Time Information is Displayed in SMP Connect ..................... 118

15 Recording Sequence of Events 119

15.1 Events ................................................................................................................ 119
15.1.1 Supported Data Point Types ................................................................ 119
15.1.2 Trigger Conditions .............................................................................. 119
15.1.3 Quality Flags ....................................................................................... 120
15.2 Sequence-of-Events Log Entries ....................................................................... 120
15.2.1 Additional Entries ............................................................................... 120
15.2.2 Syslog Entries ..................................................................................... 120
15.3 Configuring the SER ......................................................................................... 120
15.3.1 Activating the SER .............................................................................. 120
15.3.2 Customizing the Format of the Different Event Log Entries .............. 121
15.3.3 Selecting Event-Generating Data Points ............................................. 123
15.3.4 Defining Point-Specific Labels for Log Entries .................................. 124
15.3.5 Changing How Time Information is Displayed in Log Entries ........... 124
15.4 Activating Syslog Reporting of Events ............................................................. 125

16 Using the Annunciator Interface 127

16.1 Activating the Annunciator Option ................................................................... 129
16.2 Setting Up the Annunciator ............................................................................... 129
16.2.1 Defining Alarm Categories ................................................................. 130
16.2.2 Configuring Alarm Inputs ................................................................... 131

vi • Contents
 16.2.3 Setting Up the Alarms Page ................................................................ 132
16.2.4 Setting Up the Blocked Page ............................................................... 135
16.2.5 Setting Up the History Page ................................................................ 136
16.2.6 Setting Up the System State Page ....................................................... 137
16.2.7 Creating a User-Defined Readings Page ............................................. 138
16.2.8 Selecting the Pages to Display ............................................................ 145
16.2.9 Selecting the Page Displayed at Startup .............................................. 145
16.2.10 Changing How Time Information is Displayed .................................. 146
16.2.11 Setting Up an Alarm Buzzer ............................................................... 146
16.2.12 Temporarily Deactivating the Annunciator ......................................... 146
16.3 Setting Up the Touch Screen for the Annunciator ............................................. 146
16.3.1 Specific SMP Gateway Requirements for the Touchscreen ................ 147
16.3.2 Setting Up a Screen Saver using SMP Config .................................... 147
16.4 Uploading the Configuration to the SMP Gateway ........................................... 147
16.5 Calibrating the Touch Screen ............................................................................ 147
16.6 Using the SMP Gateway Annunciator............................................................... 148
16.6.1 Navigating Through the Different Pages ............................................. 148
16.6.2 Managing Alarms ................................................................................ 149
16.6.3 Blocking Alarm Inputs ........................................................................ 150
16.6.4 Using the Single Alarm Display.......................................................... 151
16.6.5 Using the History Log ......................................................................... 151
16.6.6 Monitoring System State ..................................................................... 153
16.6.7 Performing Control Operations from a Readings Page ....................... 155
16.6.8 Using the Screen Saver ....................................................................... 156
16.6.9 To learn how to set up the screen saver, see “Specific
SMP Gateway Requirements for the Touchscreen .............................. 156

17 Automation 159
17.1 The SMP Gateway Automation Functions Module ........................................... 159
17.2 The SoftPLC Module ........................................................................................ 159
17.2.1 The CoDeSys Development Environment .......................................... 160
17.2.2 Using CoDeSys to Create SMP Gateway Automation Scripts ............ 160

18 Using Syslog with an SMP Gateway 161

18.1 Setting up Syslog ............................................................................................... 161

19 Redundancy 163
19.1 Redundant Group Operation .............................................................................. 163
19.1.1 SMP Gateway A and B Designation ................................................... 164

SMP Gateway User Manual • vii

 19.1.2 Giving Priority to SMP Gateway A .................................................... 164
19.1.3 Redundant IEDs .................................................................................. 164
19.2 Grouping 2 SMP Gateways for Redundancy..................................................... 165
19.2.1 Prerequisites ........................................................................................ 166
19.2.2 Setting Up a Redundancy Group Using SMP Manager ...................... 166
19.2.3 SMP Manager Redundancy Column ................................................... 170
19.3 Managing Redundancy ...................................................................................... 172
19.3.1 Forcing an Active SMP Gateway to Fall on Standby.......................... 172
19.3.2 Additional Failover Conditions ........................................................... 172
19.3.3 Modifying the Redundancy Settings of an Existing Group ................. 172
19.3.4 Ungrouping SMP Gateways ................................................................ 172
19.3.5 Testing and Validating the Configuration ........................................... 172
19.3.6 Monitoring Redundancy Status ........................................................... 173
19.3.7 Testing a Redundant Network ............................................................. 173
19.4 Hot Standby ....................................................................................................... 174
19.5 Teaming NICs for Network Fault Tolerance (SMP 16 Only) ........................... 175

20 Setting Up the SNMP Server 177

20.1 SNMP Traps ...................................................................................................... 177
20.2 Configuring the SNMP Server .......................................................................... 177

21 Time Adjustment 179

21.1 Monitoring Time Information ........................................................................... 179
21.2 Setting the SMP Gateway Internal Clock .......................................................... 179
21.3 Automatic Clock Adjustment ............................................................................ 180
21.3.1 About GPS, IRIG-B and SNTP ........................................................... 181
21.3.2 Configuring the SMP 16 GPS Clock Option ....................................... 182
21.3.3 Using IRIG-B for Internal Clock Adjustment ..................................... 182
21.3.4 Setting Up the SMP Gateway as an SNTP Client ............................... 182
21.3.5 Using the Time Adjustment Feature of a SCADA Protocol................ 183
21.4 Using the SMP Gateway as a Time Source ....................................................... 183
21.4.1 Configuring IRIG-B Time Distribution .............................................. 184
21.4.2 Setting up the SMP Gateway to Act as an SNTP Server..................... 185
21.4.3 Adjusting Devices Clocks Using Master Protocols............................. 186

22 SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway 187

22.1 Windows Vista Setup Procedure ....................................................................... 187
22.1.1 Setting Up a Dial-Up (Modem) Connection ....................................... 187

viii • Contents
 22.1.2 Incoming Direct Serial Connections and Windows Vista ................... 190
22.2 Windows XP Setup Procedures ......................................................................... 190
22.2.1 Setting Up a Dial-Up (Modem) Connection ....................................... 190
22.2.2 Setting Up a Direct Serial Connection ................................................ 193

23 Using a Dial-Up Connection for DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101 197

23.1 Specifying Which Serial Ports Have Modems .................................................. 197
23.2 Creating a Modem Pool ..................................................................................... 198
23.3 Adding a Modem to a Modem Pool .................................................................. 199
23.4 Adding a Modem Pool Master Connection ....................................................... 200
23.5 Adding a Modem Pool Slave Connection ......................................................... 201

24 Updating SMP Gateway Software and Tools 203

24.1 Software Architecture of the SMP Gateway...................................................... 203
24.2 Version Packs .................................................................................................... 204
24.3 Updating the SMP Tools on the PC................................................................... 204
24.4 Updating the SMP Gateway Software ............................................................... 205
24.4.1 Updating the SMP Gateway Firmware ............................................... 205
24.4.2 Updating the SMP Gateway Application ............................................ 206
24.4.3 Updating the Configuration File ......................................................... 207

25 Activating a New License 209

25.1 Updating the License of an SMP Gateway ........................................................ 209
25.1.1 Protocol Classes .................................................................................. 210

26 Miscellaneous SMP Tool Features 211

26.1 SMP Manager Features ..................................................................................... 211
26.1.1 Modifying SMP Manager Settings ...................................................... 211
26.2 SMP Loader....................................................................................................... 212
26.2.1 Setting up SMP Loader ....................................................................... 213
26.2.2 Main Window ..................................................................................... 214
26.2.3 Transferring Files to the SMP Gateway .............................................. 214
26.2.4 Viewing the Log File .......................................................................... 216
26.2.5 Updating Bootstraps under Unusual Circumstances ........................... 216

27 SMP Console Functions 217

27.1 Starting SMP Console ....................................................................................... 217
27.2 Firewall Manager .............................................................................................. 217
27.2.1 R Command ........................................................................................ 218
27.2.2 S Command ......................................................................................... 218

SMP Gateway User Manual • ix

 27.2.3 H Command ........................................................................................ 218
27.2.4 Q Command ........................................................................................ 218
27.3 Time and Date ................................................................................................... 218
27.4 Clock Manager .................................................................................................. 219
27.4.1 D Command ........................................................................................ 220
27.4.2 H Command ........................................................................................ 220
27.4.3 Q Command ........................................................................................ 220
27.5 Elo Touchscreen Driver Manager...................................................................... 220

28 Troubleshooting 221
28.1 Getting Additional Help .................................................................................... 221
28.2 Creating an SMP Gateway Report File ............................................................. 221
28.2.1 Viewing an SMP Gateway Report File ............................................... 223
28.3 Restoring the Factory Settings of the SMP Gateway ........................................ 223
28.4 Startup Problems ............................................................................................... 224
28.4.1 No Configuration File ......................................................................... 224
28.4.2 Protocols Failed ................................................................................... 224
28.4.3 Critical Components Missing .............................................................. 225
28.5 Communications Problems ................................................................................ 225
28.5.1 Physical Layer ..................................................................................... 226
28.5.2 Link Layer ........................................................................................... 226
28.5.3 Protocol Layer ..................................................................................... 227
28.6 Problems with Data Validity ............................................................................. 227
28.7 Problems Executing a Control Operation .......................................................... 227
28.8 Firewall-Related Problems ................................................................................ 228
28.8.1 Recovering from a Firewall Lockout .................................................. 228

29 Appendices 231

Appendix A - System Data Points A-1

Appendix B - RTDX Status Flags B-1

x• Contents
 Figures
Figure 2-1 A simple SCADA-device master-slave configuration .................................................. 6
Figure 2-2 The SMP Gateway as a Master-and-Slave system ....................................................... 6
Figure 2-3 SMP Gateway internals: master and slave protocols with RTDX ................................ 7
Figure 2-4 SMP Gateway communication components ................................................................. 8
Figure 2-5 The transparent SMP Gateway ..................................................................................... 9
Figure 2-6 Additional SMP Gateway functions ........................................................................... 10
Figure 2-7 The SMP Gateway as a protocol translator................................................................. 11
Figure 2-8 The SMP Gateway as a data concentrator .................................................................. 12
Figure 2-9 The SMP Gateway as a communication processor ..................................................... 13
Figure 2-10 The substation SMP Gateway ..................................................................................... 14
Figure 2-11 The SMP Gateway integrated firewall........................................................................ 15
Figure 14-1 The passthrough process explained .......................................................................... 110
Figure 19-1 Using the “best of” automation function to support redundant IEDs ....................... 164
Figure 19-2 Typical failover scenario of an SMP Gateway redundancy group ........................... 165
Figure 19-3 Typical failover scenarios in a redundant network configuration ............................. 173
Figure 19-4 Acquisition data flow in a hot standby redundancy SMP Gateway group................ 175
Figure 28-1 Network layers where most communication problems occur ................................... 226

SMP Gateway User Manual • xi

 Tables
Table 4-1 Status icons in SMP Manager ..................................................................................... 22
Table 4-2 Columns in SMP Manager.......................................................................................... 22
Table 5-1 Serial port interfaces ................................................................................................... 33
Table 6-1 SMP Log command line arguments............................................................................ 48
Table 10-1 TCP ports reserved for core components or specific protocols .................................. 65
Table 10-2 SMP Gateway icons in SMP Manager ....................................................................... 66
Table 13-1 Ports to open for SMP Tools usage in a substation LAN firewall .............................. 86
Table 13-2 Privileges assigned to groups by default..................................................................... 90
Table 13-3 Ports to open in a substation LAN firewall, when not using VPN ........................... 105
Table 13-4 Optional ports to open in a substation LAN firewall, regardless of VPN usage ....... 105
Table 13-5 Ports to open in a substation LAN firewall, when using VPN ................................. 106
Table 13-6 Ports that are commonly used for RTU/SCADA communications .......................... 106
Table 15-1 Sequence of events recorder entry format keywords ................................................ 122
Table 16-1 Annunciator readings page editing toolbar controls, in SMP Config ....................... 140
Table 21-1 Time adjustment solutions available for each model ................................................ 181
Table 21-2 Time distribution delays ........................................................................................... 184
Table 22-1 Setting up a dial-up (modem) connection under Windows Vista ............................. 190
Table 22-2 Setting up a dial-up (modem) connection under Windows XP................................. 193
Table 22-3 Setting up a direct serial connection under Windows XP ......................................... 195
Table 23-1 Caller identification procedures in regard to the protocol used ................................ 198
Table 23-2 Modem pool call dispatcher settings in SMP Config ............................................... 199
Table 23-3 Modem settings in SMP Config ............................................................................... 200
Table 24-1 SMP Tools to use to update specific SMP Gateway components ............................ 204
Table A-1 System data points ....................................................................................................A-4
Table B-1 RTDX status flags .................................................................................................... B-3

SMP Gateway User Manual • xiii

1 Welcome

Congratulations on acquiring your new SMP Gateway! You now have unlimited connectivity for
all the equipment in your substation.
In this manual, we will show you how to use the SMP Gateway to integrate existing and new
RTUs, IEDs, PLCs and control centers into a single modern, homogeneous substation automation
system.
You will learn how to set up your SMP Gateway as a:
• Protocol Translator.
The SMP Gateway translates standard or proprietary device protocols to control center
protocols such as DNP3, TEJAS, IEC-60870-5-101/103/104 or IEC-61850 (UCA 2.0).
• Data Concentrator.
The SMP Gateway collects the data from all connected devices, regardless of protocol, and
makes it available to control centers using LAN, WAN, modem or serial connections.
• Terminal Server.
The SMP Gateway supports centralized maintenance, monitoring and control of all devices by
using the passthrough communication mode.
• Substation Communications Gateway.
The advanced capabilities of the SMP Gateway make it the ideal choice for any substation
automation project.

1.1 SMP Gateway Models

There are currently 3 SMP Gateway models:
• The SMP 4 has 4 ports. It comes in a compact and economical format that allows it to be
installed directly within relay protection enclosures. There is also an optional internal modem
available, which allows the SMP 4 to communicate with a SCADA or device via a dialup
connection.
• The SMP 4/DP is enhanced version of the SMP 4. It provides 2 Ethernet ports, a real-time
clock that can be synchronized to an IRIG-B time source, and is equipped with more memory
and a faster processor. An optional internal modem is also available.
• The SMP 16, which can be mounted in a 19-inch rack, comes in two versions, both of which
have the same basic characteristics:
• The SMP 16/CP is a gateway that offers 16 RS-232/485 universal serial ports, 2 Ethernet
ports and an integrated modem.
• The SMP 16/SG has, in addition, expansion slots where accessories and options can be
added to make it an ideal communications gateway for all your automation projects.

Note: Both SMP 16 versions can also be equipped with the PM option, a new 1.4 GHz
Pentium-M processor that improves the gateway's speed tenfold. This is ideal for
high-capacity application or complex automation schemes.

SMP Gateway User Manual •1

 The manual applies to all models, and differences are indicated where applicable. Refer to your
SMP Gateway installation guide for a detailed description of your particular SMP Gateway model.

1.2 Related Documentation

This manual provides you with the basic information you need to get started with your
SMP Gateway. To reduce paper use, we have included the following related documentation on the
CD-ROM you received with the product. Should you want printed documents, you can order them
from Cooper Power Systems using reference number P-DPRN-0102.
The Documentation folder contains the following related manuals from Cooper Power Systems:
• SMP 4 Installation Guide, S1120-12-1.
This document gives you detailed instructions on installing and setting up the SMP 4.
• SMP 4/DP Installation Guide, S1120-14-1.
This document gives you detailed instructions on installing and setting up the SMP 4/DP.
• SMP 16 Installation Guide, S1120-13-1.
This document gives you detailed instructions on installing and setting up the SMP 16/CP or
the SMP 16/SG.
• SMP 16 GPS Clock Option Installation Guide, S1120-13-3.
This document describes how to install the wiring and setup the software if you have the GPS
clock option for the SMP 16.
• Protocol Common Concepts Reference Manual, S1120-11-1.
This document describes the concepts and settings common to the protocols used by most
substation devices. Separate documents describe the protocol-specific settings.
In the same folder, you will also find useful documentation about the protocols implemented for
the SMP Gateway, technical notes that give additional information about the most advanced
features of the SMP Gateway, and application notes that will help you use the SMP Gateway in
your projects.

1.3 Getting Assistance

If you have any question regarding the performance, application or testing of any component of
this Cooper Power Systems product, do not hesitate to contact us. Our staff will be pleased to
assist you.
Technical Support
Cooper Power Systems
Energy Automation Solutions

Email: [email protected]
Phone: +1.763.595.7775
Toll Free: +1.800.815.2258

Business hours are from 8 a.m. and 5 p.m. CST, Monday to Friday.

1.4 Getting Started

When you receive your SMP Gateway, you have to go through several steps before you can
perform the tasks described in this document. Namely, you have to do the following:
• Unpack the SMP Gateway.
• Install the SMP Gateway.

2• Chapter 1: Welcome
 • Set-up the SMP Gateway.
• Install the PC software.
• Make the SMP Tools aware of your new SMP Gateway.
• Load the SMP Gateway firmware.

All of these steps are explained in detail in the following documents:

• SMP 4 Installation Guide, S1120-12-1.
• SMP 4/DP Installation Guide, S1120-14-1.
• SMP 16 Installation Guide, S1120-13-1.

Make sure you have performed all the steps described in those documents before proceeding
with the material explained in the present document.

1.5 Overview
Once you have performed all the steps explained in your SMP Gateway installation guide, you are
ready to perform the following tasks, as described in this user manual:
• Configure your SMP Gateway so that it can communicate with your devices:
• Define the hardware.
• Configure the master protocol instances that will communicate with your substation
devices.
• Configure the data points.
• Set-up the communications links between the SMP Gateway and the substation devices.
• Associate master protocol instances with communications links.
• Validate, activate and test your configuration.
• View the following information in real time:
• The SMP Gateway log files.
• Protocol exchanges.
• Communications statistics.
• Data points, using a Web browser.
• Configure your SMP Gateway so that it can communicate with one or more control centers:
• Configure a slave protocol instance for each control center.
• Have each control center subscribe to the data points.
• Associate slave protocol instances with communications links.
• You will also become familiar with the following SMP Gateway features:
• Security.
• Passthrough connections.
• DFR and event file processing.
• Automation functions.

SMP Gateway User Manual •3

 • Annunciator.
• Redundancy.
• SNMP exporting.
• Time synchronization.
• SMP Gateway access through a direct or dial-up connection.
• SMP Gateway access through a dial-up connection for DNP3 and IEC 60870-5-101
protocols.
• Commissioning tool.
You will also learn how to update the SMP Gateway software and tools, and to troubleshoot any
problems you may encounter with your SMP Gateway.

4• Chapter 1: Welcome
2 Principles of Operation

Electrical power utilities face a number of challenges when attempting to automate their
substations. They have legacy devices that they want to continue using. They want to integrate
new devices. They may want to add one or more control centers. They may want to use a local
HMI in order to keep a close watch on all events that occur in the substation.
There are a number of problems to contend with: connectivity, protocol incompatibilities,
interoperability problems, security considerations, logistics for migration, downtime, and not the
least of which, total project cost.
The SMP Gateway has been specifically designed to address all these issues. It is the ideal product
to ensure a smooth, safe and cost-effective approach to substation modernization. Indeed, you can
use a step-by-step approach. You decide which steps to take, in which order, and when.

2.1 Logical Architecture

The SMP Gateway is designed to meet all the requirements for power substation automation. It
has an open architecture that allows you to easily add new protocols, devices, local area networks,
wide area networks, and control centers.
In this section, we will describe the logical architecture of the SMP Gateway and we will see how
it implements all the functions required of a substation gateway.

2.1.1 Masters and Slaves

A typical automation system consists of a SCADA system, located in a control center, which is
connected to devices located in the substation. The SCADA regularly polls the devices in order to
retrieve device readings and statuses. The operator uses the SCADA system to perform control
functions on selected devices.
Since it is the control system that initiates data acquisition and control, it is considered to be the
master system. Since the substation device responds to data acquisition and control requests, it is
considered the slave system.

SMP Gateway User Manual •5

 Figure 2-1 A simple SCADA-device master-slave configuration

2.1.2 Introducing the SMP Gateway in the Automation System

When an SMP Gateway is introduced in the automation system, it has to act as both a slave and a
master. The SCADA system interrogates the gateway as if it were a substation device. The
gateway is thus a slave to the SCADA. However, since the gateway is connected to the substation
devices, it must also be able to perform the functions of a master, such as polling for data and
sending control requests.

Figure 2-2 The SMP Gateway as a Master-and-Slave system

2.1.3 SMP Gateway Internals

The SMP Gateway internal architecture is based on a series of software components called
protocol components. Slave protocol components implement all the functions necessary to process
requests received from a SCADA or control center. Master protocol components implement the
functions necessary to poll devices and send control requests. Cooper Power Systems provides
components for most standard protocols, such as DNP3, MODBUS, IEC-60870-5-101/103/104
and IEC 61850, as well as a large number of proprietary protocols such as SEL, ABB TEN BYTE,
Motorola MDAC, and more.
The master protocol component polls the device and stores the data that it retrieves in an internal
database, called Real-Time Data Exchange (RTDX). RTDX is much more than a simple data store.

6• Chapter 2: Principles of Operation

 Besides storing the current value of all the device data points, it also stores the different types of
information than can be provided by a substation device, such as the quality and timestamp of the
data. It also stores information such as device tags used for control functions.

Figure 2-3 SMP Gateway internals: master and slave protocols with RTDX

2.1.4 Communications Components

SMP Gateway protocol components process the messages exchanged among the control centers
and the devices. However, these messages can be transmitted using various communications
methods. For instance, the MODBUS protocol can be used on a TCP/IP network or on an RS-232
serial link.
SMP Gateway communications components implement all the functions required to communicate
with a device or control center using a variety of communications technologies. Cooper Power
Systems provides communications components for asynchronous serial ports, RS-232, RS-485,
TCP/IP and modems.

SMP Gateway User Manual •7

 Figure 2-4 SMP Gateway communication components

2.2 Configuring the SMP Gateway

The SMP Gateway configuration process consists of establishing the relationships among the
internal components, and providing the specific settings for each of these components. This task is
greatly simplified by the SMP Tools family of software programs. These Microsoft Windows-
based programs help you configure your SMP Gateway and identify and correct any problems.
The configuration process consists of the following steps:
• Identifying the SMP Gateway model and the installed options.
• Creating a master protocol component for each device that is connected to the SMP Gateway.
• Defining all the data points in the device.
• Defining the communications link to be used to connect the device to the SMP Gateway.

8• Chapter 2: Principles of Operation

 • Creating a slave protocol component for each SCADA or control center.
• Defining the data points that the SMP Gateway will report to the SCADA.
• Defining the communications link to be used to connect to the SCADA.
• Adding a firewall and optionally a security server that supports corporate network users.
Thus, the configuration settings define the functions that the SMP Gateway performs. These
settings are stored in a file that you load onto the gateway. The flexibility of the SMP Gateway
architecture is the basis of Cooper Power Systems’ step-by-step substation modernization strategy.
In the following sections, we will show you how you can configure the SMP Gateway to perform
all the functions required of a substation gateway.

2.2.1 The Transparent SMP Gateway

As a first step in a substation automation project, you can easily set up the SMP Gateway to act as
a transparent interface between the SCADA and a substation device. The following diagram
illustrates how you can do this using the MODBUS protocol.

Figure 2-5 The transparent SMP Gateway

SMP Gateway User Manual •9

 In this configuration, the master component polls the device and stores the values in the RTDX.
The slave component processes the SCADA polling requests and sends the values provided by the
device.
There is not much use for a transparent gateway. However, it contains much more than the
components that we described previously. Simply by adding the SMP Gateway to the substation,
you now have access to the following advanced functions:
• Centralized automation functions, using the integrated Automation functions or the IEC
61131-3 Soft PLC logic processor.
• Real-time data display, using the integrated Web server.
• Transparent access to devices, using the passthrough server, for local or remote IED
maintenance.
• SNMP support to monitor communications status.
• Sophisticated HMI, interactive diagrams, data logging and reporting, using Cooper Power
Systems’ Visual T&D software.
• Sophisticated Windows tools for remote or local maintenance.
• A sophisticated security server to support corporate network users.
Even more important, the transparent SMP Gateway is the first step in integrating new substation
devices to your existing SCADA and automation system.

Figure 2-6 Additional SMP Gateway functions

10 • Chapter 2: Principles of Operation

2.2.2 Using the SMP Gateway as a Protocol Translator
As we saw in the last section, the SMP Gateway is transparent when the master and slave
protocols are the same. When you configure different master and slave protocols, the
SMP Gateway becomes a protocol translator.
Since you can independently configure the communications links for the master and slave
components, you can easily use the SMP Gateway to integrate legacy serial devices in a modern
network environment. Similarly, you can connect modern IEDs to a legacy control center.

Figure 2-7 The SMP Gateway as a protocol translator

SMP Gateway User Manual • 11

2.2.3 Using the SMP Gateway as a Data Concentrator
The SMP Gateway architecture is designed to simultaneously support any number of master
components. Each component has its own communications link and its own protocol. All the data
retrieved from the devices is stored in the RTDX, where it becomes available to the SCADA.
Using the SMP Gateway as a data concentrator is a simple matter of configuration, and it provides
a highly efficient means of adding new devices to an existing automation system. The SCADA
system has no knowledge of the new devices; it only sees new data points.

Figure 2-8 The SMP Gateway as a data concentrator

12 • Chapter 2: Principles of Operation

2.2.4 Using the SMP Gateway as a Communication Processor
The SMP Gateway architecture supports any number of slave components. Each component has
its own communications link, and all the device data can be sent to any number of SCADA and
control centers, each with its own protocol. Using the SMP Gateway, sending data to a new
control center is a simple matter of configuration.

Figure 2-9 The SMP Gateway as a communication processor

SMP Gateway User Manual • 13

2.2.5 Putting It All Together
The sophisticated architecture of the SMP Gateway allows it to integrate existing and new RTUs,
IEDs, PLCs and control centers into a single homogeneous substation automation system. It
provides you with a complete solution for automating new substations and modernizing legacy
systems.

Figure 2-10 The substation SMP Gateway

14 • Chapter 2: Principles of Operation

2.2.6 Securing the Substation
Widespread data access within the SMP Gateway can become an important security risk if it is
compromised, but it can also become a security asset. This is why SMP Gateways are ready for
NERC CIP-002-1 to CIP-009-1 Cyber Security Standards. The gateway provides a single point of
access to all substation data. The security features of the SMP Gateway allow you to protect the
substation devices (see “Security”, page 83).
If you activate the security features within your substation SMP Gateway, you will be able to:
• comply with authentication and authorization policies;
• set up a firewall to protect from substation LAN security breaches;
• monitor and lock out remote connections.
Communications between the maintenance tools and the SMP Gateway are now performed
through TLS-encrypted links. File integrity check is also periodically performed on the
SMP Gateway files.
The access inside the firewall protection has additional layers of protection, so that only a few
users of your choice will have the possibility to modify parameters inside the substation.

Figure 2-11 The SMP Gateway integrated firewall

In the following chapters, we will learn how to configure the SMP Gateway to perform these
functions.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 15

3 SMP Tools Overview

To assist you with the tasks you will want to perform with the SMP Gateway s in your
organization, we have provided you with our suite of SMP Tools.
The SMP Tools are Microsoft Windows-based programs that make it easy for you to configure the
SMP Gateway and perform maintenance functions. They run on a PC, are simple to use, and
provide advanced features that allow you to rapidly configure all the devices and communications
links in your substation. They can be used locally or remotely through a LAN, WAN or VPN.
When authentication is activated, users must log in before they can use any function.
The SMP Tools include the following applications.

SMP Manager
Manages all the SMP Gateways in your organization. It displays the state of each gateway,
manages their configuration files and local security database, allows you to group two gateways
together to achieve redundancy, and is used to invoke the configuration and maintenance tools for
any gateway to which it is connected. From SMP Manager, you can also start Internet Explorer to
view the data points, logs and traces in real time, and you can start a console session in order to
set-up certain advanced features such as dial-up access.

SMP Config
Used to configure the SMP Gateway. It has a spreadsheet-like grid that you use to specify the
devices and control centers connected to the gateway, their protocols, their communications links
and their data points. Advanced editing functions make it easy for you to enter the data points.
Template editing allows you to pre-define standard devices with standard data points, thereby
reducing labor intensity and the possibility of errors.

61850 Config
Used to configure the IEC 61850 and UCA 2.0 protocols on the SMP Gateway.

SMP Log
Used to browse through and manage the log files maintained by the SMP Gateway. All significant
events are logged, including local and remote control events, system failures, special protocol
events, and so on.

SMP Stats
Used to browse through and manage a large variety of dynamically updated statistics, ranging
from full communications statistics for each link to the processor load for each protocol
component.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 17

 SMP Trace
Used to browse through the real-time traces generated by the SMP Gateway. SMP Trace can
display detailed traces of all protocol and communications link activity. Traces are displayed in
both hexadecimal and application protocol format. The tracing functions are similar to those
usually provided by protocol analyzers, with the notable exception that they can be used remotely
at any time on any SMP Gateway and that they decode information at the application level. As
such, they constitute an excellent commissioning or debugging tool.

SMP Connect
Used to establish passthrough connections with any IED connected to an SMP Gateway, for the
purpose of doing remote configuration and maintenance of IEDs using manufacturer-provided
software.

SMP Loader
Used to load the secondary bootstrap program. Refer to Appendix A and to your SMP Gateway
installation guide for details on using SMP Loader.

Event Translator
Used to convert event files to the COMTRADE format.

The next chapter will discuss how to create a list of SMP Gateways with SMP Manager, and will
then explain how to do a complete configuration of your SMP Gateway using SMP Config.

18 • Chapter 3: SMP Tools Overview

4 SMP Manager

SMP Manager is the doorway to your SMP Gateways. It runs on your PC, as do all the tools you
launch through SMP Manager. You are already familiar with the application, since you added your
new gateway to the list of SMP Gateways managed by SMP Manager when you installed your
SMP Gateway. This section goes over a few of the points that were covered in your SMP Gateway
installation guide, and provides additional information.

To start SMP Manager:

 On the Windows taskbar, click start.
 Point to Programs, then Cooper Power Systems, and then SMP Tools.
 From the SMP Tools menu, choose SMP Manager.

The SMP Manager main screen appears

 The Login Information window may appear. If it is the case, enter valid credentials and click
OK to login.

4.1 Main Window

The following figure shows a typical SMP Manager window.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 19

 As illustrated, the main window displays information such as:
• The list of SMP Gateways and the tools that are currently running for each gateway in the list.
• The current status of each SMP Gateway in the list (started, failed, safe mode, max safe mode,
on standby, and various intermediate states), along with the license expiration date, if any.
• The SMP Gateway model/platform (ex. SMP 4/DP, SMP 16/CP, etc.)
• The version number of the SMP Gateway application that is installed on the gateway.
• The primary IP address of the SMP Gateway.
• Whether the SMP Gateway integrated firewall is active or not.
You can choose which columns you want to display and their order of appearance, by right-
clicking on the column header.

4.2 Adding an SMP Gateway

Creating a list of the SMP Gateways you want to monitor is easy.

To add a gateway to the list:

 From the File menu of SMP Manager, choose Add SMP Gateway to add your SMP Gateway
to the list.

20 • Chapter 4: SMP Manager

  Type the name by which you want to identify your SMP Gateway in the SMP Gateway
name box.

The Configuration file box is automatically filled with a default configuration file name.
This is the file that will be created and opened by default in SMP Config. If you change this
file name afterwards through the File menu, you must come back to this dialog box and
change the name in the Configuration File text box, so it opens the right file at startup.
 In the Description box, type a short description of the SMP Gateway’s role and functions;
this property can be displayed in SMP Manager’s main window, as explained in
“Customizing the Display”, page 22.
 In the First IP Address box, type the IP address of the first Ethernet port. You can also type
the address of the second Ethernet port in the Second IP Address box, although it is not
necessary to do so.
 If the SMP Gateway cannot be directly accessed through the network, but requires a dialup
connection, clear the Automatically poll SMP Gateway’s status at startup check box to
prevent SMP Manager from polling the gateway for its status.
 To use a version of the SMP Tools that is different from the version of the software installed
on this specific SMP Gateway:
 Select Use specific version.
 Select the desired version in the corresponding box.

Note: Only versions for which a version pack is installed on the computer will be
available. To learn more about version packs, see “Version Packs”, page 204.

 Otherwise, select Use same version as SMP Gateway.

 Click Add.
The SMP Gateway gets added to the list, and SMP Manager automatically detects the gateway
model and whether an internal modem is installed.

4.3 Information Provided by the SMP Gateway

Icon
The SMP Gateway icon, which is displayed beside each gateway name, provides additional
information about the SMP Gateway.
The following table gives the meaning of each icon.

Icon Description

A device with two red LEDs.

SMP Manager is unable to establish a connection with the gateway.

A device with flashing yellow and green LEDs.

SMP Manager is connected to the gateway.

A blank page.
A file (configuration file, new software, etc.) has been modified and will be activated
when the gateway is restarted.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 21

 Icon Description

A lined page and a pencil.

A report is currently in progress. The report file provides detailed information about the
gateway. You should, therefore, send an SMP Gateway report file with any request for
technical support.

A device, flashing yellow and green LEDs and a yellow telephone.

SMP Manager is connected to the gateway via remote dialup.

A device and a telephone, grayed.

The gateway is configured for remote dialup but not currently connected to
SMP Manager.

A device with 2 red LEDs, and a yellow telephone.

SMP Manager is unable to establish a connection with the gateway over the remote
dialup connection.

Table 4-1 Status icons in SMP Manager

4.4 Customizing the Display

You can customize the display in the SMP Manager window to suit your needs. You can choose
which columns you want to display, and the order in which you want them to appear.

Column Description

Gateway The list of SMP Gateways and, if you request it, the tools that are currently running for
each gateway in the list.

IP Address The IP address of any SMP Gateways you have grouped together in SMP Manager. This
column is not available by default.

Status The current status of each SMP Gateway in the list (started, failed, safe mode, max safe
mode, on standby, and various intermediate states).

Platform The SMP Gateway model (ex. SMP 4/DP, SMP 16/CP, etc.)

Firewall Whether the SMP Gateway integrated firewall is active. This information is available
only if your version of the SMP Gateway software supports security features.

VPN Indicates if the SMP Gateway is connected to SMP Manager using VPN or not.

Group This column shows the virtual address given to the redundancy group. If the address is
modified, the new address will appear beside the old one, separated by an arrow. Upon
the next reboot, the device will be grouped under the new address only.

Security This column shows whether authentication is activated or not, locally or through
IED Manager Suite, and how recent is the security database stored on the SMP Gateway.

Description This column shows the Description property of the SMP Gateway, as specified when the
unit was added to the list of SMP Gateways monitored in SMP Manager.

Table 4-2 Columns in SMP Manager

22 • Chapter 4: SMP Manager

4.4.1 Adding or Removing a Column
To toggle between displaying a column and removing it from the display:
 Right-click any column heading.
 From the shortcut menu, locate the column you are interested in. Put or remove a checkmark
to add or remove the column to or from the display.
OR
 From the View menu, choose Columns, and then click the name of a column you want to add
or remove.

4.4.2 Changing the Position of a Column

To change the order of a column in the display:
 Click the column heading of the column you want to relocate.
 Drag the heading to the target location.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 23

5 Configuring the
SMP Gateway

As we saw under “Principles of Operation”, page 5, you have to configure the SMP Gateway
before you can use it. For this, you use SMP Config to define the characteristics of your
SMP Gateway and the functions it has to perform. The configuration is stored in a file that is then
loaded onto the SMP, where it is stored in non-volatile flash memory.
Using SMP Config, you will perform the following configuration steps:
• For an SMP 16/SG, define the hardware options installed.
• Create a master protocol instance for each device to be supported.
• Define each data point on each device.
• Configure the communications link to be used to connect to each device.
• Create a slave protocol instance for each SCADA or control center.
• Configure the communications link to be used to connect to the SCADA.
• Map the device data points to SCADA data points.
You will then use SMP Manager to send the configuration file to the SMP Gateway.

Note: There can only be one instance of SMP Config running at any given time.
If you launch the tool for a given SMP Gateway and then launch it again for a
second SMP Gateway, SMP Config will prompt you to save any changes you
have made, close the configuration file of the first gateway, and then open the
configuration file of the second gateway.

To create a configuration file for your SMP Gateway:

Start SMP Manager.
 Select the SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Config to start the application.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 25

 The SMP Config display includes 3 panes. The left pane is a tree structure of all the configuration
topics. The top right pane displays the settings for the topic you have selected in the left pane. The
bottom right pane appears when your request that the configuration be validated; it displays error
and warning messages.
The gateway name is the name you assigned when you added the SMP Gateway in SMP Manager.
The configuration file name on the title bar was also assigned when you added the SMP Gateway
in SMP Manager.
If you open the Master Protocols and Slave Protocols branches, you will see that the tree
structure offers you a fixed set of protocols. These are the protocols currently supported by your
product license.

5.1 Creating Master Protocol Instances

You need to add a master protocol instance for each device you want to access with your
SMP Gateway (see Figure 2-2, page 6). Even if a number of devices share a multidrop link, each
of them requires its own master protocol instance. Each device is a slave, so the gateway acts as a
master when communicating with the device, which is why it requires a master protocol instance.
There are two ways to add the master protocol instance:
• You can use a template, which eases the task of configuring the master protocol instance, by
automatically entering the points list for the device. SMP Config provides templates for a
number of common substation devices.
• If no template is available, you will need to enter the points list. If you are configuring a
number of devices of the same type, you can save the first device configuration as a template
that you will then use to configure the other devices.
Once you have added a master protocol instance and entered its data points (manually or via a
template), you can click a particular data point type in the left pane and see the list of data points
and their settings in the right pane, as shown next.

26 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

 To create a master protocol instance from a template:
 In the left pane, open the Master Protocols branch, to display the list of master protocols
provided under your product license.
 In the left pane, click the protocol for which you want to add an instance.

The list of all defined master protocol instances appears in the right pane.
 From the Tools menu, choose New Instance From Template.
 Choose the appropriate template, and click Open.
 In the dialog box, enter:
• The name of the new instance.
The following characters cannot be used as part of an instance name: the comma (,), the
quotation mark (") and the slash (/).
• The device prefix.
The device prefix is a string that identifies the device and is used as a prefix for all of its
data point names. The prefix ensures that every name in the system is unique. An
explanation of the usage of prefixes is provided under “Device Prefix and Naming
Conventions for Data Points”, page 28.

Note: The following reserved words and characters cannot be used as part of a device
prefix: the word “_smp” (which is the device prefix of system data points), the
comma (,), the quotation mark ("), the semicolon (;) and the grave accent (`).

The new instance appears in the left pane. If you open its tree structure and click the various
physical data point types, all the data points supported by the device will be displayed in the right
pane.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 27

 To create a master protocol instance manually:
 In the left pane, open the Master Protocols branch, to display the list of master protocols
provided under your product license.
 In the left pane, click the protocol for which you want to add an instance.
The list of all defined master protocol instances appears in the right pane.
 In the right pane, type the name of the new instance at the end of the list of names, and press
the TAB key on your keyboard.

Note: The following characters cannot be used as part of an instance name: the
comma (,), the quotation mark (") and the slash (/).

The new protocol instance is added in the left pane, under the protocol type you had selected. If
you expand its tree branch and click an item, the corresponding protocol settings will be displayed
in the right pane. Note that if you click a physical data point type in the left pane, the right pane
will display an empty row since you will have to add the physical data points manually.

5.1.1 Device Prefix and Naming Conventions for Data Points

A typical substation automation project requires the configuration of thousands of data points.
You can significantly reduce the effort by carefully planning how to name devices and data points.
Cooper Power Systems tools provide additional functionality if the names of data points are based
on some type of convention. For our engineering projects, we use a naming convention such as the
following:
• A data source name, such as the substation name: MAPLE, CEDAR.
• A voltage level: 220 or 25.
• A device name: L1 to indicate a line, T1 to indicate a transformer, F1 to indicate a feeder,
BUS for a bus bar.
• A signal name: V_phsA_mag to indicate the phase A voltage magnitude, A_phsA_mag to
indicate the phase A current magnitude, Pos_st to indicate the status of a breaker or a line
switch.
With such a convention, a data point called CEDAR_220_BUS_V_phsA_mag clearly indicates
the voltage magnitude of phase A on the 220 kV bus of the CEDAR substation. A data point
called MAPLE_025_F1_Pos_st indicates the status of the breaker switch of feeder 1 at the
Maple substation.

5.1.2 Configuring the Master Protocol General Settings

All master protocol components share common settings that define how they interact with a
device.

Note: If you created the protocol instance from a template, the general settings have
been defined for you. However, you should verify the settings to make sure they
match your device configuration, and you should familiarize yourself with the
naming conventions discussed in this section.

To specify general settings for a master protocol:

 In the left pane, click General to display the list of general settings for the selected protocol.
 In the right pane, type a Device Prefix.

28 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

 The string you enter will be used as a prefix for all the I/O point names of the device. It is
mandatory for each instance of a protocol. It is used to distinguish data point names that are
on the same device type, but on multiple physical devices. The device prefix ensures that
every data point name in the system is unique. Device prefixes are described in the “Device
Prefix and Naming Conventions for Data Points” section, page 28.

Note: The following reserved words and characters cannot be used as part of a device
prefix: the word “_smp” (which is the device prefix of system data points), the
comma (,), the quotation mark ("), the semicolon (;) and the grave accent (`).

 Still in the General settings, enter the scanning settings.

For instance, to configure a MODBUS master protocol, you would provide settings such as
the following:
• A Device Address, typically 1.
• A MODBUS Type, typically RTU Serial.
• A Scan Interval, typically 1000 milliseconds.
A complete description of all settings is provided in the document entitled Master Protocol
Common Concepts. Protocol-specific settings are described in individual documents, such as the
DNP3 Master Protocol Reference Manual.

Note: The following characters cannot be used as part of a data point name: the
comma (,), the quotation mark ("), the semicolon (;) and the grave accent (`).

5.1.3 Accessing Protocol-Specific Documentation

There are Cooper Power Systems documents available, to which you can refer for details on the
settings of the currently supported protocols.

To access the documents:

 Click start, on the Windows taskbar.
 Point to All Programs, then Cooper Power Systems, then SMP Tools, and then
Documentation.
 From the Documentation menu, choose Protocols.

The list of available documents is displayed in an explorer window.

 Click the document you want to read.
 From the File menu of the explorer window, choose Open with Acrobat.
Your Adobe Acrobat program starts up and displays the document in a window.

5.2 Configuring the Data Points

Once you have provided the general settings of the protocol component, you then enter all the data
points on the device. If you created the protocol instance from a template, all the data points have
already been added; however, we suggest you read this section for your information.
A physical data point represents a real-life value, implemented on an external device. You need to
identify all the device data points, either manually or using a device template.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 29

 A system (logical) data point is a value managed by the SMP Gateway. These data points are
available by default on the system and cannot be modified, but they can be deactivated.
Protocol components typically support physical and logical data points of the following types:
• Analog inputs
• Binary inputs
• Analog outputs
• Binary outputs
Analog inputs are measured values. The system keeps 2 values for each analog measurement
obtained: a raw value, which is usually the value retrieved from the device, and a calculated value
expressed in engineering units, obtained using the following standard formula:
Engineering value = (Raw Value X Scaling Factor) + Offset
Binary inputs represent the state of a data point. The state is either ON or OFF.
Analog and binary outputs are typically initiated by a slave component, which sends a control
request originating from a control center, to the master component involved.
When you create a data point, you specify the type of data and indicate how the SMP Gateway
will retrieve it. General properties such as name, type and units, are independent of the type of
device or protocol used. Protocol-specific properties indicate how the SMP Gateway will retrieve
the data from the device. Each protocol uses its particular form of addressing, such as index values
or data offsets.
For example, to add a data point for a MODBUS device:
 Click the appropriate branch under the protocol instance.
 In the right pane, type the name of the data point and fill in all the appropriate settings.
For instance, to define an analog input you would provide the following settings:
• The name of the data point, such as BUS_VA. SMP Config will automatically add the
device prefix to this name, thereby generating the full name of the data point.
• The input source, such as Input Registers.
• The input format, such as Unsigned Integer.
• The input size, such as 16 or 32 bits.
• The word offset in the MODBUS device memory.
• The scaling information required to convert the raw value to engineering units.
• The Units and Description strings used to provide meaningful data displays.
A complete description of all settings is provided in the document entitled Master Protocol
Common Concepts. Protocol-specific settings are described in individual documents, such as the
MODICON MODBUS Master Protocol Reference Manual. A complete description of system data
points can be found in the section entitled “Appendix A - System Data Points” on page A-1 of this
manual.

To access the various protocol documents:

 Click start, on the Windows taskbar.
 Point to Programs, then Cooper Power Systems, then SMP Tools, and then
Documentation.
 From the Documentation menu, choose Protocols.

30 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

5.2.1 Adding Data Points from a Protocol Template
Protocol templates can also be used to add points to a protocol component. For instance, you could
use a template to add the data points provided by an optional device feature. You can do this by
retrieving the data points from a protocol template.

To add data points from a protocol template:

 In the left pane, click the protocol instance to which you want to add the data points.
 From the Tools menu, choose New Points from Template.

A standard Windows “Open” dialog box appears.

 In the Templates folder for the protocol type you selected, choose the TPL file you want to
use, and click Open.

A dialog box appears, prompting you for the optional prefix and suffix to be added to every
new data point name. The upper portion of the dialog box provides information about the
open template file, while the lower portion shows warning and error messages.
 Specify a prefix and a suffix, if applicable.
The new data points now appear in their respective categories under the selected protocol instance,
and their names contain the specified prefix and suffix.

Note: The prefix and suffix are not applied to logical data points, and that the logical
data points are reset every time you add data points from a protocol template.
You should, therefore, configure these data points once you have completed the
list of physical data points.

5.3 Creating a Template from a Master Protocol

Instance
You can create a template of a master protocol instance, which you can retrieve later in order to
quickly generate new protocol instances.

To create a template from a master protocol instance:

 From the File menu, choose Save As Template.
 Choose the Templates folder in which you want to store the template, type a significant name
for the template file, and click Save.

Note: A template file can contain only one protocol instance. So if you want to create
templates for several protocol instances, create a new configuration for each one
and save individual templates.

5.4 Duplicating a Master Protocol Instance

Once you have created a master protocol instance and configured its data points, you may want to
generate one or more additional instances with the same general and data point settings. A quick
way to accomplish this is by duplicating the master protocol instance.

To duplicate a master protocol instance:

 In the left pane, click the protocol instance you want to duplicate.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 31

  From the Tools menu, choose Duplicate.

A dialog box appears, prompting you for the instance name and device prefix.

 Type the name and prefix of the protocol instance.

 Click OK.
The new protocol instance now appears in the left pane.

5.5 Configuring the Communications Links

A protocol component communicates with a device or control center using one of the following: a
serial link, a modem or a TCP/IP network. The configuration of a communications component is
completely independent of the protocol used. Before you connect a device to the SMP Gateway,
you have to choose and configure its communications links.

5.5.1 Configuring the Serial Port Interfaces

Depending on the options you choose in the hardware configuration, you can configure the
SMP Gateway serial ports to support RS-232 or RS-485 communications.

To configure a serial port interface:

 Click Serial Ports in the left pane, to display all the available ports.
 For each port, choose the type of interface to be used. Most substation devices typically use
the Asynchronous interface for RS-232 or RS­485 communications.

The purpose of each interface is given in the following table:

32 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

 Interface Description

Asynchronous Use this value to indicate that the serial port is dedicated to establishing
a standard asynchronous RS-232 or RS-485 connection.

Modem Asynchronous This value indicates that the port is used for modem asynchronous
communication. The value is automatically assigned to the Modem port
of an SMP 16 or of an SMP 4/DP equipped with an internal modem, and
to the COM4 Board A port of an SMP 4 equipped with an internal
modem.

RAS (remote access server) Use this value to indicate that the serial port is configured to accept
incoming direct serial connections. This type of connection allows you
to use the SMP Tools as if you were connected to the SMP Gateway via
a normal network connection. By default, the CONSOLE port is always
configured for RAS.
Refer to the SMP 4 Installation Guide, S1120-12-1, the SMP 4/DP
Installation Guide, S1120-14-1, or to the SMP 16 Installation Guide,
S1120-13-1, for instructions on setting up a RAS IP address pool. Then
refer to “SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway”, page 187, in
the present manual, for the step-by-step installation procedure.

Redundancy Use this value to indicate that the serial port is reserved for connecting
two SMP Gateways together as a redundancy group. See “Grouping 2
SMP Gateways for Redundancy”, page 165.

Elo Touchscreen Use this value to indicate that the touch input information of an Elo
Touchscreen will be transmitted to the SMP 16 using a serial cable,
through this serial port.
This interface is not available on the SMP 4 and the SMP 4/DP.

Radio Use this value to indicate that a radio will be connected to this serial
port.

K-BUS Use this value to indicate that the serial port is used to communicate
with MiCOM relays from AREVA that provide a K-BUS interface.
This interface can only be assigned to serial ports A02 and A10 of an
SMP 16. For an SMP 4 or an SMP 4/DP, connect a KITZ 101 interface
unit between the serial port of the gateway and the K-BUS interface of
the relay.

D20-HDLC Use this value to indicate that the serial port is reserved for to
communicate with GE D20 substation controllers using the HDLC link
layer protocol.
This interface can only be assigned to the COM2 serial port of an
SMP 16.

Reserved Use this value to indicate that the serial port is reserved for purposes
other than those stated previously.

Table 5-1 Serial port interfaces

5.5.2 Serial port naming conventions

In SMP Config, the various serial ports are named differently based on the SMP Gateway model.
The following naming conventions apply:

SMP Gateway User Manual • 33

 • The SMP 16 provides 16 serial ports, identified as A01 through A16. It also has a modem port
labeled MODEM, which has a Modem Asynchronous interface.
• The SMP 16/SG can also house up to 2 additional serial ports boards, which will be identified
as B01 to B16 and D01 to D16.
• The SMP 4/DP provides 4 serial ports, identified as COM1 through COM4. If the SMP 4/DP
is equipped with an internal modem, the modem port is labeled Modem, and the Modem
Asynchronous interface is assigned to it.
• The SMP 4 provides 4 built-in serial ports. These ports are identified as COM1 Board A
through COM4 Board A.
• The SMP 4 also provides a built-in CONSOLE serial port. This port is identified as
Built­in Console 1 Board A. This feature allows you to use the CONSOLE port as a standard
serial port.
• If the SMP 4 has an internal modem, then it provides 3 built-in serial ports and 1 built-in
modem port. These ports are also identified as COM1 Board A through COM4 Board A;
however, the Interface column in the right pane indicates that the interface for
COM4 Board A is Modem Asynchronous.

5.5.3 Configuring the Operation of the Serial Ports

Each serial port needs to be configured with the appropriate settings for the connected device.

To specify serial port settings:

 In the left pane, open the Connections branch to display all the supported connection types.
 Click Asynchronous Serial Ports to display the list of available ports.

Note: If you choose Redundancy as the interface for a serial port, this port will not
appear in the list of Asynchronous Serial Ports, as it will be reserved for
connecting the 2 SMP Gateways that will be grouped together.

 In the right pane, enter the settings for the selected serial ports. The required settings are
usually provided in the device manufacturer’s reference manual:
 If you are using RS-485 2-wire communication, choose RS-485 (2 wires).
 If you are using RS-485 4-wire communication, choose RS-485 (4 wires).
 Choose the device communications settings: baud rate, byte size, parity and number of
stop bits, such as 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.
 Choose the device hardware handshaking mode:
 If the link type is RS-232, most devices do not use handshaking, so you should keep
the default values: RTS to Always On, DTR to Always On, and CTS to Ignore.
 If the link type is RS-485 (4 wires), set RTS to Always On. You shouldn’t have any
problem if you keep the other default values: DTR to Always On, and CTS to
Ignore.
 If the link type is RS-485 (2 wires), set RTS to TX Request. You shouldn’t have
any problem if you keep the other default values: DTR to Always On, and CTS to
Ignore.
 If software flow control (XON/XOFF) is supported by the device and required:
 Select XON/XOFF (Output).

34 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

 The serial port driver will delay transmission if it receives the XOFF character, and
will start transmitting again if it receives the XON character.
 Select XON/XOFF (Input).

The serial port driver will transmit the XOFF character if it receives more characters
than it can handle, and will transmit the XON character when it will be ready to
receive and process more characters.
 In the XON Limit cell, type the number of bytes that must be left in the reception
buffer, following the transmission of the XOFF character, before transmitting the
XON character.

For example, if the XOFF character had to be transmitted to the device and the XON
Limit setting value is set to 1, the serial port driver will wait until there is only 1
character left in the reception buffer before transmitting the XON character.
 In the XOFF Limit cell, type the minimum amount of free space, in bytes, that must
be left in the reception buffer, before transmitting an XOFF character.

For example, if the reception buffer can hold up to 500 bytes and the XOFF Limit
setting value is set to 5, it means that the XOFF character will be transmitted as soon
as there is 495 characters waiting to be processed in the reception buffer.
 If the device supports non-standard values for the XON and XOFF characters, type
these values in the XON Char and XOFF Char cells, using the C-programming
language notation (“0x”).

5.5.4 Reserving a Serial Port for Radio Usage

Some devices may only be accessible through radios, requiring the installation of an external radio
on one of the serial port of the SMP Gateway. This port must be reserved, and the radio type and
settings must be specified at configuration time.

To reserve a serial port for radio usage:

 In the left pane, click Serial Ports.
 In the right pane, for the given serial port, select Radio in the Interface cell.
 Expand the Serial Ports branch, and then click Radios.
 In the right pane, in the Radio Type cell, select the type of radio between the following types:
• Spread Spectrum.
Uses a large number of channels to send data from one radio to the other. The channel
hopping is defined in a scheme common to the pair of radios.
• License frequency.
Uses a single frequency/channel. It generally requires paying a fee for the use of the
frequency.
• Custom.
If the radio used does not correspond to any of the aforementioned type, select this value.
 Expand the Radios branch, and then select the given serial port branch.
 Specify the serial communication settings to use for this serial port. The required settings are
usually provided in the device manufacturer’s reference manual:
 Choose the device communications settings: Baud Rate, Byte Size, Parity and number
of Stop Bits, such as 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 35

  Choose the device hardware handshaking mode:
 In the RTS (Output) cell, specify how to handle the RTS (Request-to-Send) signal.
In most cases, the default value will work.
 If RTS (Output) is set to TX Request:
 Specify, in the RTS Pre-delay cell, the time to wait, in milliseconds, after
the raise of the signal and before the transmission of the first byte.
 Specify, in the RTS Post-delay cell, the time to wait, in milliseconds, after
the transmission of the last byte, before lowering the signal.
 In the DTR (Output) cell, specify how to handle the DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
signal. In most cases, the default value will work.
 In the CTS (Input) cell, specify how to handle the CTS (Clear-to-Send) signal. In
most cases, the default value will work.
 In the CD (Input) cell, specify how to handle the CD (Carrier Detect) signal. In most
cases, the default value will work.

5.5.5 Configuring TCP/IP Master Connections

TCP/IP connections are most often used by slave components to connect to control centers.
However, an increasing number of modern IEDs can be connected to a substation LAN using a
TCP/IP connection.

To configure a TCP/IP connection for a master protocol component:

 In the left pane, click Connections, and then on TCP/IP Masters, to display the list of
defined connections.
 In the right pane, enter the settings for the new TCP/IP connection in an empty row of the
grid:
 Provide a significant name for the connection.
 Enter the IP address of the device.
 Enter the TCP port number of the device. This information is provided by the device
manufacturer.
 If the IED supports TLS version 1.2 or earlier, or SSL version 3.0 or earlier, select Use
SSL/TLS: all data transmitted over this connection will be encrypted using the SSL/TLS
protocol, and all received data that will not be encrypted will be rejected.

Note: Master TCP/IP connections that are encrypted by the SMP Gateway cannot be
used for passthrough.

Also note that the SMP Gateway does not implement RFC 5746, which defines a
TLS extension for renegotiation indication.

 (Optional) If you need to force the SMP Gateway to bind the connection socket to a
specific IP address, type this address in the Socket Bind Address cell.

For example, if the SMP Gateway is used in a redundancy context, you can specify the
virtual IP address of the SMP Gateway redundancy group; when a failover occurs, this
will ensure that the standby SMP Gateway will use that address to reestablish the
connection with the IED,

36 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

5.5.6 Configuring UDP/IP Master Connections
Some IEDs are accessible using the UDP protocol, rather than TCP. The UDP protocol allows the
broadcast of messages to several units simultaneously. It may also allow faster message
transmission, although it may be achieved to the expense of reliability.

Note: Although UDP is a “connection-less” protocol, the word “connection” is used in

SMP Config to describe a communication link that is configured between a
master protocol instance of an SMP Gateway and IED(s) that support this UDP-
based protocol.

To configure a UDP/IP connection for a master protocol component:

 In the left pane, click Connections, and then on UDP/IP Masters, to display the list of
defined connections.
 In the right pane, enter the settings for the new UDP/IP connection in an empty row of the
grid:
 Provide a significant name for the connection.
 In the Destination IP Address cell, type the IP address of the device.
 In the Destination Port cell, type the UDP port number of the device. This information is
provided by the device manufacturer.
 (Optional) In the Source Port cell, type the local source UDP port number that will be
used on the SMP Gateway for transmission and reception. To use a random port number,
type 0.
 (Optional) For the connection to receive data addressed to a multicast group, type the IP
address of this group in the Listen IP Multicast cell.
 (Optional) If you need to force the SMP Gateway to bind the connection socket to a
specific IP address, type this address in the Socket Bind Address cell.

For example, if the SMP Gateway is used in a redundancy context, you can specify the
virtual IP address of the SMP Gateway redundancy group; when a failover occurs, this
will ensure that the standby SMP Gateway will use that address to reestablish the
connection with the IED,

5.6 Associating a Master Protocol Instance with a

Communications Link
In the preceding steps, you configured a master protocol component and a communications
component. Now, you have to associate the protocol component with the communications
component.

To associate a master protocol instance with a communications link:

 In the left pane, click Connection Usage.
 In the right pane, for each master protocol instance under Master Connection Usage, select
the check box under the appropriate connection instance.

Note: If you have several devices that share a multidrop link, each device must have a
different device address.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 37

5.7 Validating and Saving the Configuration
Since the configuration of an SMP Gateway offers so many features, SMP Config tests and
validates the configuration files before you load it onto the gateway. Before going any further, you
should make sure your configuration is error-free. Then, you will send it to the gateway in order to
test it in a real-life situation.

To validate and save the configuration:

 From the Validate menu, choose Validate All. If your configuration contains any errors,
messages will appear in the Messages pane, as shown next.
 Correct any errors and repeat the process until the configuration is error-free.

 From the File menu, choose Save.

38 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

 Note: You cannot save a configuration file that contains errors. This feature is intended
to prevent you from inadvertently loading an invalid configuration file onto an
SMP Gateway. However, you can save your configuration file if the Messages
pane displays warnings only.

5.7.1 Sending the Configuration to the SMP Gateway

Once the configuration file is valid, you can send it to the SMP Gateway.

To upload the configuration to the SMP Gateway:

 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Update menu, choose Send Configuration File and choose your configuration file,
which has been saved in the location you specified in the Gateway Properties dialog box.

After sending the file to the SMP Gateway, SMP Manager informs you that you have to
restart your SMP Gateway for the new application to go into effect.
 In the Restart Gateway dialog box, choose Shutdown and Restart to have the
SMP Gateway restart in normal mode.
 All restarts are automatically logged in the SMP Gateway internal log file. You can type a
comment to indicate why you restarted the SMP Gateway. This comment will be added to the
event log.
The SMP Gateway will go through a series of startup steps, which will be displayed in the Status
column of your SMP Gateway. When startup is complete, if your configuration file is correct, the
Status column will show Started, to indicate that the gateway has started normally.
If your configuration file is incorrect, the Status column will indicate that there is a problem.
There are a number of conditions that can prevent the SMP Gateway from activating a
configuration. For instance, the hardware settings may not match the actual physical configuration
of the SMP Gateway. If the gateway does not start up normally, turn to “Troubleshooting”,
page 221.
Now that you have a working configuration file with all the master data points, you can use the
other SMP Tools and Internet Explorer to see what is going on with the SMP Gateway and with
the connected device.

5.7.2 Retrieving an SMP Gateway Configuration File

When you are about to send a configuration file to an SMP Gateway, as described previously, you
should first retrieve the old configuration file from the SMP Gateway and store it on your PC. This
will not be necessary when you first configure your SMP Gateway, but on subsequent updates, it
becomes an important precaution to take.

To retrieve an SMP Gateway configuration file:

 Select the SMP Gateway in the list.
 From the Update menu, choose Get Configuration File.

In the Configuration Download dialog box, SMP Manager displays the available
configuration files. The current configuration file is identified by the “.PAR” extension, while
the previous configuration file is identified by “.OLD”. You might also see files with the
“.TXT” or “.AIT” extension.
 Choose the “.OLD” file, and click the OK button.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 39

  In the Save As dialog box, specify the name and path where the configuration file is to be
stored. The name of the configuration file on the SMP Gateway is used as the default name.

5.8 Working with SMP Config

There are many time-saving features you can use to enter data in an SMP Config grid. These
features are presented next.

5.8.1 Selecting Cells and Rows

To select one or several cells:
 Click the single cell you wish to select.
 To select several cells, hold down the CTRL key while clicking the cells.
 To select part of a column or part of a row, click the first cell, hold down SHIFT and click the
last cell you wish to select.

To select a column or a row:

 Click the header of the row you want to select.
 To select several rows or columns, hold down the CTRL key while clicking their header.
 To select a group of rows or columns in a sequential order, select the header of the first one,
hold down the SHIFT key and select the last one.

5.8.2 Duplicating a Row

To duplicate a row:
 Click the header of the row you want to duplicate.
 From the Edit menu, choose Duplicate Line.

The row is duplicated after the last row in the display.

In the following example, we clicked on a row and clicked the Duplicate Line command twice, so
the row appears twice at the bottom of the list.

5.8.3 Copying a Value to a Group of Cells

The Change Selection command of the Edit menu allows you to copy a value from a particular
cell, to one or more rows selected within the same column.

40 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

 To copy a value to one or more selected cells:
 Click the cell to which you want to copy a value.

If you are selecting more than one cell, use the CTRL key or the SHIFT key on your
keyboard, as per standard Windows procedure.
 From the Edit menu, choose Select Cells.

This makes the cells turn gray, as shown next.

 Click in the cell that contains the value you want to copy. In the example, we clicked in the
CI_01 Scale cell.

 From the Edit menu, choose Change Selection.

The value is copied to the selected cells.

 To deselect the cells, click Clear Selection in the Edit menu.

To add cells to the selection afterwards:

 Select the desired cells using the CTRL key or the SHIFT key on your keyboard, per the
standard Windows procedure.
 From the Edit menu, choose Add to selection.

5.8.4 Re-sequencing a Group of Rows

Some settings are sequenced, within a given column. You may decide to remove data points, in
which case you will need to remove gaps in the numbering sequence. While re-sequencing all the
entries manually would be quite tedious, the Resequence Selection command of the Edit menu
makes it easy.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 41

 In the following example, the row with Index 7 has been deleted. All subsequent index numbers
are now incorrect.

To re-sequence these rows:

 Click the cell with Index 8.
 Hold down the SHIFT key of your keyboard and click the last cell in the column.
 From the Edit menu, choose Select Cells.

The cells turn gray.

 From the Edit menu, choose Resequence Selection.

A dialog box appears, in which you must specify the starting sequence number (7) and the
increment (1). The result is shown next.

 To deselect the cells, click Clear Selection in the Edit menu.

42 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

5.8.5 Deleting an Item
To delete a row in a grid:
 In the right pane, click the header of the row you want to delete.
 Press the DEL key on your keyboard, and confirm your intention of deleting the row.

The item disappears from the grid.

To delete a protocol instance:

 In the left pane, click the protocol type.

The list of instances of this protocol type appears in the right pane.
 In the right pane, click the protocol instance you want to delete.
 Press the DEL key on your keyboard, and confirm your intention of deleting the row.

The protocol instance disappears from both panes.

By their very nature, serial port connections cannot be deleted in the same way. To delete a serial
port connection, you have to reserve the corresponding serial port for another usage.

To delete a serial port connection:

 In the left pane, click Serial Ports.
 In the right pane, choose Reserved in the Interface list of the serial port.

5.8.6 Using Tooltips

SMP Config provides context tooltips. These tooltips are not displayed on the status bar but rather
appear when you point with the mouse to a cell in any grid. This type of tooltip normally displays
the editing criteria for the field. For example, it may tell you that a given timeout setting value
must fall between 10 and 1000 milliseconds, that the default value is 500 milliseconds, that the
field is mandatory if a certain other field is selected, and so on. So they will assist you in editing
grids.
Here is a sample tooltip:

This feature is a great time and effort saver, as it spares you from having to wait until you try to
validate or save your SMP Gateway configuration before finding out that you have a number of
errors.

5.8.7 Searching and Replacing Points in a Configuration

To help you find all the references to a point in a configuration, a search function is available in
SMP Config.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 43

 To access the search function:
 From the Edit menu, choose Find Points.

OR

Press CTRL-F.
 In the Find Points dialog box, type the point name you are looking for and click the Find
button. The results appear in the list below.
 Select the point in the list, the application will bring you to the configuration zone of the
point.

As shown above, one point can be used in several situations. If you need to change the naming
scheme in your configuration, rename the point and the other points created from it will
automatically bear the new name.

44 • Chapter 5: Configuring the SMP Gateway

6 Viewing the SMP Log Files

The SMP Gateway maintains an internal log of all significant events. Using SMP Log, you can
select and view the various log files in real time. You can view, print, search and save all or any
information in this application.

To start SMP Log and view the SMP log files:

 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Log.

SMP Log starts up and displays the list of available logs.

 Click a log in the left pane, to view its contents in the right pane.

6.1 Information Provided by SMP Log

The following log files contain information that you will find useful for the configuration and
maintenance of your SMP Gateway:
• The Startup log records all the steps that the SMP Gateway performed when it last started.
The log indicates which configuration file was loaded and which protocol components were
configured and started. You should consult the startup log each time you change the SMP
configuration, in order make sure it is a success.
• The Reset log records the time and reason for each SMP Gateway restart. It indicates whether
the reset occurred because of a power failure, a request from the front panel button, a remote
request, a watchdog trip, or a fatal hardware or software problem.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 45

 • The Control log records the steps that the SMP Gateway performed in response to a local or
remote control request.
• The Security log records all events that concern the security options such as authentication
failures, file integrity check and much more.
The other SMP log files contain information that can help you and our technical support team in
identifying problems.

6.2 SMP Log Features

SMP Log offers you several handy features: searching, printing and saving log file, and having the
information displayed in UTC or local time.

6.2.1 Searching in SMP Log

To search in SMP Log:
 From the menu View, choose Search. You can also press CTRL-F, or click the binoculars
button in the toolbar.
 Type a keyword in the text box and click the Search button. All the results will become
highlighted; the first one will be lighter.
 To go to the next result, choose Search Next from the View menu, or press F3.
 To go to the previous result, choose Search Previous from the View menu, or press SHIFT-
F3.
 Once you have found, choose Cancel Search from the View menu and only the selected
result will remain highlighted.

6.2.2 Printing a Log

To print a log:
 Select a folder.
 From the menu View, choose Print. You can also press CTRL-P or click the printer button in
the toolbar.

6.2.3 Saving a Log File

To save a log file:
 Select a folder.
 From the menu View, choose Save As.
 Type a name for the file; you can use a different extension such as “.CSV” or “.TXT”.

6.2.4 Viewing Multiple Log Folders at Once

To view multiple log folders at once:
 Select folders, using the SHIFT or the CTRL key.

46 • Chapter 6: Viewing the SMP Log Files

  The contents of all folders will be displayed altogether in the right pane, in chronological
order.

6.2.5 Changing How Time Information is Displayed

To change how time information is displayed:
 From the View menu, choose Time Display Options.
 In the Time Display Format box, select the display type: you can choose between the local
time (using the time zone settings of the PC) and UTC. Normally, the clock of the
SMP Gateway is set in UTC, but you can display the information using the time format you
like.

6.2.6 Deactivating the Auto Scroll Feature

By default, when a new entry is added to the selected folder, the display pane automatically scrolls
down to that new entry.

To prevent the display pane from scrolling when a new entry is added:
 From the View menu, choose Auto Scroll to remove the checkmark beside this command.
 Repeat the previous step to bring the checkmark back and reactivate automatic scrolling.

6.2.7 Log Retrieval by Scripting

As opposed to real-time traces, log entries are intended to be stored permanently on the
SMP Gateway, as long as there is enough space on disk. Actually, each log folder can store a
maximum number of log entries; when this maximum is exceeded, the oldest entries are deleted.
To ensure that no log entries are lost, you can retrieve them on a periodic basis and save them to
files in a location where disk space is not a concern, by invoking SMP Log from the command line
in a script.

SMPLog.exe Syntax
SMPLog.exe /ip <address> /nosplash /rpc
[/combinedlog]
/logmode { complete | diffonly | append}
/logdir <directory>
/local /user "<username>" /pass "<password>"

Argument Description

/ip <ip> Provide the IP address of the SMP Gateway from which to
retrieve the log entries.

/nosplash Optional. If specified, prevent the display of the SMP Log splash
screen at startup.

/rpc Force SMP Log to communicate with the SMP Gateway using
RPC.
Note: This setting is mandatory, unless you are attempting to retrieve
log entries from an SMP Gateway running version 5.0 or
earlier of the SMP Gateway software, which used DCOM.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 47

 Argument Description

/combinedlog Optional. If specified, all log entries will be merged in a single

file; otherwise, separate files are used for each log folder.

/logmode { complete | Indicates which log entries should be retrieved and saved:
diffonly | append}
 complete.
Create a new file containing the entire log contents.
 diffonly.
Create a new file containing only the new log entries that
were recorded since last execution.
 append.
Appends new entries to the most recent file; file will be
created if it does not exist.

/logdir <directory> Indicates the destination path of the saved log files.
Note: This setting is mandatory, as it triggers the log retrieval
feature; it if it is missing, SMP Log will start normally, if other
provided settings are valid (IP address, account credentials,
etc.)

/local Mandatory. Force SMP Log to use SMP Gateway local

authentication.

/user "<username>" Provide the username, surrounded by quotes, of an SMP Gateway

local account that has sufficient privileges (see “Notes” below).

/pass "<password>" Provide the corresponding password, surrounded by quotes, of the

SMP Gateway local account that has sufficient privileges (see
“Notes” below).

Table 6-1 SMP Log command line arguments

Notes
• To retrieve standard log entries, the specified user account must have the “Diagnostic”
privilege; to retrieve entries from the “Firewall” and “Security” logs, the account must have
the “Security Management” privilege.
• By default, log entries are stored in files named using the corresponding log folder name and
current date and time (ex. Security_20100324_211946_UTC.log).

If you specify the /combinedlog switch, all log entries are saved in a single file
(ex. All_20100324_211946_UTC.log)

Example
The following command line will retrieve only new log entries from the SMP Gateway at the IP
address provided by the first command line argument (%1):
Smplog.exe /NOSPLASH /RPC /LOCAL /IP %1 /LOGDIR c:\logs\%1
/LOGMODE DIFFONLY /USER “Alice” /PASS “A8bCk67P”

48 • Chapter 6: Viewing the SMP Log Files

7 Viewing Protocol
Exchanges in Real Time

Using SMP Trace, you can view a continuous stream of protocol exchanges between the SMP and
the substation devices, or between the SMP Gateway and the control center.
At this stage, however, since you have only configured master protocol instances, you will only
see the protocol exchanges that take place between the SMP Gateway and the substation devices.
You can have the information displayed in UTC or local time, highlight the rows that contain
specific keywords, and you can clear the current display. SMP Trace can generate a continuous
log of all the events you are tracing, to a text file on your PC. It can also print or save to a text file,
a snapshot of the traced events that occurred since the last time you cleared the display.

To start SMP Trace and view the protocol exchanges:

 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Trace.

7.1 Information Provided by SMP Trace

SMP Trace starts up and displays the list of available traces.

To customize the display and select specific traces:

 In the left pane, select the item for which you want to view the protocol exchanges.
 If you click a folder, everything within the folder is automatically selected.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 49

 Using SMP Trace, you can view detailed traces of all the system activity. The following traces
provide information that you will find useful during the configuration and maintenance of your
SMP Gateway.
• Master and Slave Protocol traces display the high-level information exchanges that occur
between the SMP Gateway and the other system components to which it is connected. These
application-level traces are similar to those provided by a protocol analyzer. They describe the
requests sent to a device and the values retrieved. The Slave Protocols folder appears only if
slave protocol instances are configured on the SMP Gateway.
• Connection traces display the data being exchanged between the SMP Gateway and a device.
These low-level traces describe, in hexadecimal format, the byte stream sent and received to
and from a device.

7.2 SMP Trace Features

SMP Trace offers you several handy features: recording traces, searching, printing and saving
trace records, and having the information displayed in UTC or local time.

7.2.1 Searching in SMP Trace

When a large amount of traces are currently displayed, it may be hard for the user to find the
information he is looking for. SMP Trace provides a search feature that highlights all traces that
contain a specific keyword:

To search displayed traces for a specific keyword:

 From the menu View, choose Search. You can also press CTRL-F, or click the binoculars
button in the toolbar.
 Type a keyword in the text box and click the Search button. All the results will become
highlighted, and the first one will be lighter. You can click the Pause/Resume button in the
toolbar to stop the screen from scrolling; this command is also available from the View menu.
 To go to the next result, click Search Next in the View menu, or press F3.

50 • Chapter 7: Viewing Protocol Exchanges in Real Time

  To go to the previous result, click Search Previous in the View menu, or press SHIFT-F3.
 Once you have found, choose Cancel Search from the View menu and only the selected
result will remain highlighted.

Note: SMP Trace will keep highlighting matching results as long as you have not
canceled the search. You can either deselect the binoculars in the toolbar or stop
the search from the View menu.

7.2.2 Printing Traces

To print currently displayed traces:
 From the File menu, choose Print. You can also press CTRL-P or click the printer button in
the toolbar.

7.2.3 Recording Live Traces

To record live traces to a file for further analysis:
 From the Record menu, choose Start or click the red button in the toolbar.

 You can also choose to save it on the SMP Gateway by selecting Record to SMP Gateway.
For example, if you have an SMP 4/DP with a modem on a pole outdoors and you need to
save 24-hour worth of activities, long distance costs are most of the time prohibitive. Use this
option and connect again 24 hours later to pick up your data.
 When you wish to stop the recording, click the red button again or click Stop in the Record
menu.

7.2.4 Saving all the Scrolled Information

To save all the information in SMP Trace that scrolled since opening it:
 Select a folder.
 From the File menu, choose Save As. You can also press CTRL-S or click the disk button in
the toolbar.
 Type a name for the file; it will be saved in text format (TXT).

SMP Gateway User Manual • 51

7.2.5 Changing How Time Information is Displayed
To change how time information is displayed:
 From the View menu, choose Time Display Options.
 In the Time Display Format box, select the display type: you can choose between the local
time (using the time zone settings of the PC) and UTC. Normally, the clock of the
SMP Gateway is set in UTC, but you can display the information using the time format you
like.

7.2.6 Deactivating the Auto Scroll Feature

By default, when a new entry is added to the selected folder, the display pane automatically scrolls
down to that new entry.

To prevent the display pane from scrolling when a new entry is added:
 From the View menu, choose Auto Scroll to remove the checkmark beside this command.
 Repeat the previous step to bring the checkmark back and reactivate automatic scrolling.

52 • Chapter 7: Viewing Protocol Exchanges in Real Time

8 Viewing Communications
Statistics in Real Time

The SMP Gateway stores a large number of real-time statistics and internal counters to help you
analyze the performance of your SMP Gateway and assist you in troubleshooting your
configuration. Using SMP Stats, you can view, in real time, various statistics about the
communications links and about the protocol exchanges that take place between the SMP Gateway
and the devices or control centers. You can have the information displayed in UTC or local time.
You can also print the statistics, reset them, or save them to a text file for subsequent analysis.

To start SMP Stats and view the statistics:

 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Stats.
 In the left pane, click the item for which you want to view the statistics.

The statistics are displayed in the right pane and you can see them change dynamically.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 53

8.1 Information Provided by SMP Stats
Statistics provide information on the SMP Gateway activity, which can be useful for the
configuration and maintenance of the gateway itself. This information is organized as pages and
folders. A folder does not contain any statistics: it is a place holder for statistics pages.
When you open SMP Stats, its displays the following folders:
• The Connections folder regroups counters and statistics pages about the performance of the
SMP Gateway communications components:
• The Network (TCPIP) folder contains the list of all the network connections you defined
under Connections, in SMP Config. Each connection has its own statistics page.
• The Serial (Asynchronous) folder contains the list of all the serial connections. As in the
Network folder, there is a statistics page for each connection.
• The Modem Pool folder contains the list of any modem pools and modems you may
have defined in SMP Config. The statistics found in these folders provide an easy way to
monitor the communications status of the SMP Gateway. For example, you can look at
the Receive counter and Transmit counter values to determine whether the gateway is
exchanging data with a connected device or control center.

Note: The Modem Pool folder is visible only for the SMP 16, which has an integrated
modem, and for the SMP 4 or the SMP 4/DP purchased with the modem support
option. Furthermore, a modem pool must be configured on the SMP Gateway.

• The Master Protocols and Slave Protocols folders contain counters and statistics about each
instance of a protocol component. Each protocol component contains protocol-specific items
that describe the messages exchanged with a device or control center.
(The Slave Protocols folder is missing, in the previous example, because we have to define
slave protocol components first.)
• The System folder contains counters and statistics about the operation of the SMP Gateway
hardware and software.

8.2 SMP Stats Features

SMP Stats offers you several handy features: resetting statistics, printing them, refreshing them,
and changing how time is displayed.

8.2.1 Resetting Statistics

You can reset certain statistics, such as global RTDX or Web server statistics:
 From the menu View, choose Reset; or click the 'X' button; or press CTRL+X.

8.2.2 Printing Statistics

To print a statistics page:
 Select a folder.
 From the File menu, choose Print. You can also press CTRL-P or click the printer button in
the toolbar.

54 • Chapter 8: Viewing Communications Statistics in Real Time

8.2.3 Changing How Time Information is Displayed
To change the display format of time-specific statistics:
 From the View menu, choose Time Display Options.
 In the Time Display Format box, select the display type: you can choose between the local
time (using the time zone settings of the PC) and UTC. Normally, the clock of the
SMP Gateway is set in UTC, but you can display the information using the time format you
like.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 55

9 Using a Web Browser to
View Data in Real Time

The integrated secure Web server (eSMP) of the SMP Gateway provides an easy way to view the
log files and statistics using your Internet Explorer Web browser. It is also the easiest way to view
the analog and binary input and output points in real time.

Note: The eSMP Web server requires version 5.0 or a later version of the Microsoft
Internet Explorer Web browser. JRE (Java Runtime Environment) must also be
installed on your computer. See the SMP Gateway installation guide for details.

9.1 Connecting to the SMP Gateway Website

Whether it is to view the SMP Gateway log files, statistics or data points’ real-time data, you
always proceed the same way to connect to the SMP Gateway Website:
 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose Internet Explorer.

Your Internet Explorer Web browser will open and connect to the SMP Gateway Web server.
You may have to wait a few seconds while the Website is loaded and the Java platform is
initializing. The Website Home page will eventually appears in your browser.

Note: The SMP Gateway Website is accessible using the Hypertext Transfer Protocol
over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS). By default, the SMP Gateway integrated
firewall allows communications through the HTTPS port (443). Make sure such
communications are also permitted over the substation LAN and through the
corporate firewall.

9.2 Navigating Through the SMP Gateway

Website
The SMP Gateway Website has a number of tabs at the top that allow you to switch between
different data views:
• The Home tab gives you key information about your SMP Gateway, such as its current state,
at what time it started up, and the list of master and slave protocol instances contained in your
configuration.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 57

 • The Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Input, and Binary Output tabs display the
current value of all the SMP Gateway data points.
• The Logs tab displays the contents of the internal SMP Gateway log files. The data is the
same as provided by the SMP Log program.
• The Statistics tab displays the SMP Gateway real-time statistics. The data is the same as
provided by the SMP Stats program.
• The Commissioning Tool tab is only available when commissioning has been activated on
the SMP Gateway. For more information about this feature, see “Using the Web Server
Commissioning Tool”, page 69.

Note: If authentication is active on your SMP Gateway, everything will be de­activated

until you type a valid username and password under eSMP Login.

9.3 Applying a Filter to a Data Point Display

If you click the Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Input and Binary Output tabs, you can
see all the data points change dynamically on your screen. Since there may be a large number of
data points, you can use the Filter function to choose the points you want to display.

To apply a filter:
 Select the tab in which you want to filter data points.
 In the toolbar, type the filter criterion. It can be the device prefix, or any other text that is
common to the data points you want to display.

58 • Chapter 9: Using a Web Browser to View Data in Real Time

 Note: You may specify up to 5 criteria. For example, if you type smp clock, all data
points that contain the words “smp” and “clock” will be displayed; others will be
hidden.

 Click Apply. Only the data points that contain the filter criterion in any field (such as the
point name or address) will be displayed. The criterion text is highlighted over the point
name.

To remove the filter:

 Click Cancel.

All data points of the selected tab will be displayed.

Each tab preserves its own filter information, allowing you to navigate through the different tabs
and specify different filter criteria for each one of them.

9.4 Acknowledging Data Point Value Changes

To help you analyze your data, the Web server automatically highlights any data point that
changes value, by displaying it on a gray background. The data point stays highlighted until you
acknowledge the change of value. You can also have the Web server automatically acknowledge
value changes after a short delay.

To have the Web Server automatically acknowledge the value changes:

 Click the appropriate tab to choose the type of data.
 Select the Auto Ack. check box located at the top right, above the data point display.

Data points will now be highlighted when their value changes and the display will return to
normal after a short delay.

To manually acknowledge value changes for a particular type of data point:

 Click the appropriate tab to choose the type of data.
 Make sure that the Auto Ack. check box is cleared.

Data points will now be highlighted when their value changes. They will remain highlighted
until you acknowledge the change of value.

To remove all highlighting:

 Click Acknowledge, located at the top left above the data point display.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 59

10 Connecting the
SMP Gateway to a Control
Center

Now that we have seen how to configure master protocol instances, tested the SMP Gateway
configuration and viewed the collected data, we will see how to configure, using SMP Config, a
slave protocol instance in order to forward the device data to a SCADA or a control center.

10.1 Creating Slave Protocol Instances

When the SMP Gateway communicates with a control center, it acts as a slave and as such, needs
to use a slave protocol. One slave protocol instance is required per control center.

To create a slave protocol instance:

 In the left pane of SMP Config, under Slave Protocols, click the protocol for which you want
to add an instance.
 In the right pane, type the name of the new instance at the end of the list of names, and press
the TAB key.
The new protocol instance is added to the left pane, under the protocol branch you had selected. If
you expand the protocol branch, SMP Config displays default settings of the protocol instance.

10.2 Configuring Slave Protocol Instances

The configuration of a slave protocol component is similar to that of a master protocol component.
You choose the protocol, enter the protocol settings, and specify the data points you want
forwarded to the SCADA.

To configure a slave protocol instance:

 In the left pane, click General, to display the list of general settings for the selected slave
protocol instance.
 In the right pane, enter the protocol settings.
For instance, to configure a DNP3 slave component, you would provide settings such as:
 The Link Address, which identifies the logical slave device. The address has to match
the address used by the control center to communicate with the SMP Gateway.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 61

  The Master Link Address, which identifies the control center.
 Whether or not you want to support Unsolicited Reporting.
 In the left pane, click Default Variations.
 In the right pane, specify how you want the data points to be reported. For example, you may
want to specify that when there is a change to an analog input point, you want the change
reported as a 32-bit value, with the time at which the event took place.
A complete description of the protocol-specific settings is available in individual documents, such
as the DNP3 Slave Protocol Reference Manual, for example.

To access the various protocol documents:

 Click Start, on the Windows taskbar.
 Point to Programs, then Cooper Power Systems, then SMP Tools, and then
Documentation.
 From the Documentation menu, choose Protocols.

10.3 Subscribing to the Master Data Points

Slave protocol instances subscribe to data points in the real-time database. Whenever a master
protocol instance writes to the database, the slave instance retrieves the data and applies its own
settings to make it compatible with the requirements of the control center protocol.
When you configure a slave protocol component, you select from among all the data points
defined by the master protocol components, those data points to which you want to subscribe.

To subscribe a slave to master data points:

 In the left pane, click the slave protocol instance.
 In the Tools menu, click Subscribe To.

62 • Chapter 10: Connecting the SMP Gateway to a Control Center

  Click in the Master I/O list, to display the list of data points defined for each master protocol
instance.
 Choose the data points you want to forward to the control center.
Use the CTRL and SHIFT keys on your keyboard, to extend your selection.
 Click the right arrow button.

The data points you choose are added to the Slave I/O list. If, for example, you click a binary
input point in the Master I/O list, the point is added to Binary Inputs, in the Slave I/O list.

Note: The added points will be indexed in the order they appear in the Slave I/O list.

For some protocols, additional arrow buttons are available to the right of the
Slave I/O list. Using these buttons, you can sort the points according to your own
indexing requirements.

Normally, a data point that has been transferred to the Slave I/O list disappears from the Master
I/O list. However, if you want the transferred data points to continue being displayed in the
Master I/O list:
 Select the Show all enabled points check box.

If you change your mind, you can remove a data point from the Slave I/O list as follows:
 Click the data point in the Slave I/O list.
 Click the left arrow button.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 63

 The data point is removed from the Slave I/O list and reinserted in the appropriate data point list
for the appropriate master.

10.4 Configuring the Data Points

The slave component automatically converts the subscribed data points to the appropriate format
for the protocol. However, you should make sure the default settings are appropriate and perform
any necessary adjustments.

To configure the data points:

 In the left pane, click the data point type, to display a list of all the data points and their
settings.
 There are different settings for each protocol. However, you should at least check the address
or index assigned to each data point.

For instance, the following settings are provided for a DNP3 data point:
• Each data point is automatically assigned an Index value according to the subscription
order. You should ensure that these index values correspond to those expected by the
control center.
• The Event Class setting groups data points together for subsequent reporting to the
control center.

10.5 Configuring the Communications Links

We previously described how to configure a serial communications link for a master protocol
component. The procedure is identical for a slave protocol component that uses a serial
communications link. However, a slave protocol component typically uses a TCP/IP connection
(or an UDP/IP connection, in some cases) over a LAN, to communicate with the control center.
For more information about communications link configuration, see “Configuring the
Communications Links”, page 32.

10.5.1 Setting up a TCP/IP Slave Connection

To configure a TCP/IP connection for a slave protocol component:
 In the left pane, under Connections, click TCP/IP Slaves, to display the list of defined
connections.
 Enter the settings for the new TCP/IP connection in an empty row of the grid:
 Specify a significant name for the connection.
 Specify the TCP port number to be used.
 Select from the Accessible From list box whether the connection will be accessible from
any computer (Any Computer), from a specific one through the SMP Gateway
integrated firewall (Specific Computer or Subnet), or via a VPN connection (VPN
Only (Firewalled)).
 If you selected Specific computer or subnet, type an address or an address range in the
following column.

64 • Chapter 10: Connecting the SMP Gateway to a Control Center

  If the control center supports TLS version 1.2 or earlier, or SSL version 3.0 or earlier,
select Use SSL / TLS: all data transmitted over this connection will be encrypted using
the SSL/TLS protocol and all received data that will not be encrypted will be rejected.

Note: The SMP Gateway does not implement RFC 5746, which defines a TLS
extension for renegotiation indication. It is also recommended to use a control
center or master station that does not implement this RFC, or to deactivate the
transmission of the renegotiation indication extension to the SMP Gateway.

Some TCP ports are reserved for the SMP Gateway core components or for specific
servers/protocols. They cannot be used for TCP/IP slave connections. These ports are presented in
the following table.

Reserved TCP Port Usage

20-21 FTP

23 and 107 Telnet protocol

80, 8080 and 8008 HTTP

443 HTTPS

123 SNTP

135 NETBIOS

139 NETBIOS SSN

161-162 SNMP

389 LDAP

1217 CoDeSys

6650 SMP Gateway management port

1234-1235, 4567, 26179 and 49152 Reserved by the SMP Gateway core components.

1723 PPTP

Table 10-1 TCP ports reserved for core components or specific protocols

10.5.2 Setting up a UDP/IP Slave Connection

Although UDP is a “connection-less” protocol, the word “connection” is used in SMP Config to
describe a communication link that is configured between a slave protocol instance of an
SMP Gateway and control centers that support this UDP-based protocol.

To configure a UDP/IP connection for a slave protocol component:

 In the left pane, under Connections, click UDP/IP Slaves, to display the list of defined
connections.
 Enter the settings for the new UDP/IP connection in an empty row of the grid:

SMP Gateway User Manual • 65

  Specify a significant name for the connection.
 Specify the UDP local source port number to be used.
 Select from the Accessible From list box whether the connection will be accessible from
any computer (Any Computer), from a specific one through the SMP Gateway
integrated firewall (Specific Computer or Subnet), or via a VPN connection (VPN
Only (Firewalled)).
 If you selected Specific computer or subnet, type an address or an address range in the
Specific computer or subnet cell.
 (Optional) To receive data addressed to a multicast group through this connection, type
the IP address of this group in the Listen IP Multicast cell.
 (Optional) In the Destination IP Address cell, type the IP address of the device.
 (Optional) In the Destination Port cell, type the UDP port number of the device. This
information is provided by the device manufacturer.
 In the Destination Usage cell, select how the optional destination parameters will be
handled:
 If data must always be sent to the configured Destination IP Address and
Destination Port, select Always Use.
 If data must always be sent to the originating address and port of the last received
data, and to use the configured Destination IP Address and Destination Port only
when no data was received yet, select When destination unknown.
Some UDP ports are reserved for the SMP Gateway core components or for specific
servers/protocols. They cannot be used for UDP/IP slave connections. These ports are presented in
the following table.

Reserved UDP Port Usage

161-162 SNMP

1723 PPTP

6650 SMP Gateway management port

Table 10-2 SMP Gateway icons in SMP Manager

10.6 Associating a Slave Protocol Instance with a

Communications Link
You now have to identify the communications link which will be used by the slave component to
communicate with the control center.

To associate a slave protocol instance with a communications link:

 In the left pane, click Connection usage.
 In the right pane, for each slave protocol instance under Slave Connection Usage, select the
check box under the appropriate connection instance.

66 • Chapter 10: Connecting the SMP Gateway to a Control Center

10.7 Validating and Activating the Configuration
You can now validate the configuration, save it on your computer, send it to the SMP Gateway,
and restart the gateway in order to activate the configuration.
The procedures for doing this were described earlier, in the “Validating and Saving the
Configuration” section, page 38.

10.8 Testing the Configuration

The SMP Gateway configuration now contains a slave component. Slave components are more
difficult to test than master components, since they only process data in response to a request from
a control center. You may find the following guidelines useful in determining whether the slave
component is working properly:
• Using SMP Log, check the Startup log, to see whether the slave component was started
correctly.
• Using SMP Stats, open the Slave Protocols folder and check whether the slave component is
processing any data.
• Using SMP Stats, open the Connections folder, and check whether any data is being
exchanged through the slave communications link.
• Using SMP Trace, open the Slave Protocols folder, and check whether the component is
receiving requests from the control center.
• Using SMP Trace, open the Connections folder, and check whether any data is being
exchanged through the slave communications link.
See the following sections for instructions on how to proceed to view the information:
• “Viewing the SMP Log Files ”, page 45.
• “Viewing Protocol Exchanges in Real Time”, page 49.
• “Viewing Communications Statistics in Real Time ”, page 53.
• “Using a Web Browser to View Data in Real Time”, page 57.
A particularly effective way to test a slave protocol instance is to use the SMP Gateway itself to
set up a master protocol instance to poll the slave. Using this approach and the SMP Tools, you
can easily examine the effect of the various protocol features, such as report by exception.
You can also use the Web server commissioning tool, as described in the next chapter.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 67

11 Using the Web Server
Commissioning Tool

The SMP Gateway integrated Web server also provides a commissioning tool that simplifies the
engineering effort required for the implementation and the integration of a substation. It is
intended to help technician(s) and/or engineer(s) testing the SMP Gateway configuration and
connectivity with the substation devices and the SCADA.
The Web server commissioning tool, when configured and activated, is accessible through a Web
browser, the same way than for viewing data in real-time. It may be enabled by users that have the
System Management privilege, and the operation privilege is required for users that will perform
the commissioning operations, which are essentially the following:
• Forcing an analog/binary input point to a specific value/state.
This operation allows the validation of the configuration of the SMP Gateway’ slave protocol
and the SCADA, by verifying if all the gateway data points are correctly mapped on both
sides, if minimum/maximum values are correctly handled, etc.
• Performing a control operation on an analog/binary output point.
This operation allows the validation of the master protocols’ configuration, by verifying if the
IED data points are correctly configured in their corresponding masters, if scale and offset
settings are correctly specified for each data point, etc.
For example, by forcing each data point of an IED on the SMP Gateway, the technician/engineer
can verify that these points are correctly configured, and that transitions/changes for these are
correctly handled by the SCADA. On the other side, by executing control operation directly on the
SMP Gateway, instead of performing them on the SCADA, the technician/engineer can validate
that the masters’ output points are correctly configured.

11.1 Configuring an SMP Gateway for

Commissioning
If you intend to use the Web server commissioning tool on your SMP Gateway, you must first
enable it in the gateway configuration, using SMP Config.

To configure an SMP Gateway for commissioning:

 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Config.
 In SMP Config, under the System branch, select Web Server, and then select the General
branch.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 69

  Select the Commissioning Tool check box.
 Save the configuration file and send it to the SMP Gateway, using SMP Manager.
 Restart the SMP Gateway.
Your SMP Gateway now supports the commissioning feature, which still need to be activated by a
user that has the System Management privilege, as described in the following section.

11.2 Activating the Commissioning Feature

Commissioning is not a process that is performed frequently. Done once when the SMP Gateway
is deployed in the field, it may be executed later, during maintenance sessions or when new
devices are added to the substation configuration.
Before letting the user perform commissioning in the field, a user that has the System
Management privilege must activate the commissioning feature. Usually, this user would first
make sure that all safety precautions have been taken, that the SMP Gateway is really going
through maintenance and that the commissioning process may occur as planned. By activating the
feature, the operator in charge of commissioning can then start a commissioning session, and do
his work.

To activate the commissioning feature:

 Connect to the SMP Gateway Website, by following the procedure described in section 9.1,
page 57.
 At the Website Home page, under Commissioning Tool, click Activate.

The button text will change to Deactivate, and the Start Session button on the right will become
available. The operator may now start a commissioning session.

Note: Commissioning will remain active until the left button is clicked again to
deactivate it. If the SMP Gateway is restarted, the commissioning feature activity
state will be persisted: if it was active prior to the restart, it will be active at startup
and vice-versa. However, sessions in progress will be terminated.

11.3 Starting a Commissioning Session

Once the commissioning tool has been activated on the SMP Gateway, any user that has the
Operation privilege can start a commissioning session.

To start a commissioning session:

 Connect to the SMP Gateway Website, by following the procedure described in section 9.1,
page 57.
 At the Website Home page, under Commissioning Tool, click Start Session.

70 • Chapter 11: Using the Web Server Commissioning Tool

  Click Yes.

The button text will change to End Session and the Commissioning Tool tab is now
available.
 To use the commissioning tool, click the Commissioning Tool tab.

Note: The commissioning session will remain established as long as the Web browser
will remain connected to the Website, or until the user click again the button on
the right. The session is also terminated when the SMP Gateway restarts.

11.3.1 The Commissioning Tab

The Commissioning tab looks quite similar to other data points tabs. It is divided in three
sections:
• The toolbar, which is located at the top.
Is used for filtering, forcing, control operation and acknowledging purposes. It is an extended
version of the toolbar available in other data point tabs, and its content varies in function of
the type of the selected data point(s). The following figure shows the toolbar for a binary
input point:

• The data points list.

Displays the data points of every protocol instance or subsystem of the SMP Gateway. This
implies that a data point that is configured in a master protocol and in two slave protocols will
be listed three times.
• The Messages pane, which is located at the bottom.
Displays a log of all commissioning tool operations, statuses and errors.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 71

 The columns of the data point list are mostly the same that are displayed in the other data points
tabs. The following columns are specific to (or different in) the commissioning tab:
• Instance.
The name of the protocol instance or subsystem to which the data point belongs.
• Type.
The data point type.
• Integer Value.
Usually, the integer value of an analog point is displayed here. In the commissioning tool tab,
it is also used for the state of a binary input point, as the State column is only used for binary
output points.
• State.
As stated above, in the commissioning tool tab, this column is used to display the current state
of a binary output point.
The various commissioning operations that you can perform are described in the following
sections.

11.3.2 Forcing an Input Point

The most common commissioning operation is to force an input point to a specific value/state, and
to verify that the forced value is correctly reported to the SCADA.

To force an input point to a specific value:

 In the data points list, select the input point you want to test.
 In the commissioning toolbar, specify the forced value/state:
 If it is an analog input point, select whether to change the Integer or Float value of the
point, using the Force drop-down list, and then type the forced value in the edit box.
 If it is a binary input point, select the desired state using the Force drop down list.
 Still in the commissioning toolbar, click Execute to force the point to the specified value.
 In the Messages pane, you should see two new messages: the first one indicates that the force
operation has been performed; the second displays the operation result.
 If the operation was successful, the status column will display Forced (Test) for the data
point.
 If the operation was successful and both the SMP Gateway and the SCADA are correctly
configured, the value/state changes should be reported correctly to the SCADA.

Note: You cannot force the value/state of multiple data points simultaneously.

11.3.3 Reverting an Input Point to its Current Value

To revert an input point to its current value:
 In the data points list, select the forced input point.
 In the commissioning toolbar, click Revert.

The point will revert to its current value/state.

72 • Chapter 11: Using the Web Server Commissioning Tool

 To revert multiple input points to their current value simultaneously:
 In the data points list, select more than one input points that have been forced.
 In the commissioning toolbar, click Revert All.
 In the message box that appears, click Yes to revert the selected input points.

Note: As stated in the message box, this operation may take a while, depending on the
number of input points to revert. Also, data points included in the selection that
have not been forced will not be modified by this operation.

You can also revert all forced data points to their current value, by clicking Revert All in the
commissioning toolbar.

11.3.4 Performing a Control Operation

When an IED support control operations, it is important to validate that its related output points
are correctly configured on both the SCADA and the SMP Gateway sides. Such validation is
achieved in two steps, for each output point:
• Perform a control operation using the Commissioning Tool, to make sure that the point is
correctly configured in the SMP Gateway master configuration and that the control result is
correctly reported to the SCADA.
• Perform a control operation from the SCADA standpoint, as a final validation to make sure
that both the SCADA and the SMP Gateway slave configurations are correct.

To perform a control operation using the commissioning tool:

 In the data points list, select the output point you want to test.
 In the commissioning toolbar:
 Specify the control type using the Control drop-down list.

Note: If the output point supports select and execute control types, remember to test
both control types.

 Specify the control value:

 If it is an analog output point, select the control value type (Integer or Float) using
the appropriate drop-down list, and then type the control value in the edit box.
 If it is a binary output point, select the control state (Pulse, Open or Close) using the
appropriate drop-down list. If you selected Pulse, type the pulse duration, in
milliseconds, in the edit box.
 Click Execute to perform the control operation.
 In the Messages pane, you should see two new messages: the first one indicates that the
control operation has been performed; the second displays the operation result.
 If the operation was successful and both the SMP Gateway and the SCADA are correctly
configured, the control operation result should be reported correctly up to the SCADA.

Note: You cannot perform control operations on multiple output points simultaneously.

As mentioned earlier in this section, the validation of the output point`s configuration at the
SCADA and in the SMP Gateway is achieved by performing a control operation directly from the

SMP Gateway User Manual • 73

 SCADA. Even if it does not involve the commissioning tool, the Web browser can still be useful,
since it gives access to the SMP Gateway log files, including the Control log file.
Various entries are added to the Control log when a control operation is executed on the
SMP Gateway, making it an essential resource for this portion of the commissioning task.

To consult the SMP Gateway Control log entries in the Web browser:
 Select the Logs tab.
 In the left pane, select the Control log file.

All the log entries will appear in the right pane, the oldest entry being displayed at the top.

11.3.5 Closing the Commissioning Session

Even if a commissioning session automatically ends when the Web browser is closed, you should
close the session manually.

To close the commissioning session:

 In the Web browser, click the Home tab.
 Under Commissioning Tool, click End Session.

 As stated in the dialog box, the commissioning tool will restore all forced points to their
acquisition values. Click Yes.

The button text will change to Start Session and the Commissioning Tool tab will no longer
be available, until a new session is established.

11.4 Deactivating the Commissioning Feature

When commissioning has been performed on the SMP Gateway, the user that has System
Management privilege must deactivate the commissioning feature for obvious safety reasons and
to ensure that the system will function as expected.

To deactivate commissioning:
 Connect to the SMP Gateway Website, if you are not already connected, by following the
procedure described in section 9.1, page 57.
 At the Website Home page, under Commissioning Tool, click Deactivate.

74 • Chapter 11: Using the Web Server Commissioning Tool

 The button text will change to Activate, and the button on the right will become unavailable.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 75

12 Data Monitoring and
Control through the
SMP Gateway HMI

In this chapter, the reader will learn about the SMP Gateway HMI feature, which allows users to
perform data monitoring and control operations directly on the SMP Gateway, without having to
go through an external HMI, the SCADA, or any other control center.

12.1 The SMP Gateway HMI

The SMP Gateway HMI is a function intended to provide enhanced access to the data gathered by
an SMP Gateway.
Using Visual T&D Diagram Editor, users can draw a single-line representation of their substation,
distribution or transmission grid, load the corresponding multi-pages diagram on the
SMP Gateway, and then access it either locally, through a touchscreen connected directly to the
SMP Gateway VIDEO port, or remotely through a Web browser.
When authentication is active on an SMP Gateway that runs a single-line diagram, only users who
are granted the Monitoring privilege can access it remotely; remote control operations can also be
performed through the SMP Gateway Single-Line Diagram, by users who are granted the
Operation privilege.

12.2 SMP Gateway HMI Display Options

SMP Gateway Single-Line Diagrams can be displayed either locally, through a touchscreen
connected directly to the SMP Gateway VIDEO port, or remotely through a Web browser.
Both display options offer the same features, with the following small differences:
• Local display does not offer any authentication or authorization mechanism.
• The Home, Previous and Next navigation buttons, which are usually located in the top left
corner are not available on local display; users can move from one diagram page to another by
using the page selection combo box located in the upper left corner, or by clicking on diagram
shapes that give access to other pages.
• On local display, a virtual keyboard appears when alphabetical or numerical user input is
required.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 77

 • On local display, a combo box control is available in the upper right corner to dynamically
change the current display language.
• A Memory Usage indicator is available on the local display, when the SMP Gateway does
not have enough memory to load all diagram pages.
• Local display supports a screen resolution of 1024 x 768.
• Local display allows access to the SMP Gateway Annunciator, if this option is configured on
the SMP Gateway.

Note: The Local Display option is also known as the “SMP Gateway Local HMI”.

12.3 SMP Gateway HMI Requirements

The SMP Gateway HMI feature requires the following Cooper Power Systems products, and
software.

For remote display (through a Web browser):

• An SMP 4/DP or SMP 16 gateway equipped with the Celerom (CM) or Pentium M (PM)
processor option
• SMP Gateway Software and Tools Version 6.2 or later
• Visual T&D Version 3.7, or later (to create and edit the diagram)
• Google Chrome, or version 8, or later, of Microsoft Internet Explorer (version 9 is highly
recommended).

For local display:

• An SMP 16 gateway equipped with the Pentium M processor option
• SMP Gateway Software and Tools Version 6.3 or later
• Visual T&D Version 3.7, or later (to create and edit the diagram)
• A touchscreen (or a “non-touch” screen with a mouse)

Note: You do not have to purchase a Visual T&D license if you do not already own one:
a Development mode is available, which allows the use of Visual T&D Diagram
Editor without having to deploy a complete Visual T&D system.

12.3.1 Specific SMP Gateway Requirements for the Touchscreen

Cooper Power Systems recommends the use of a touch screen from Elo TouchSystems with the
SMP Gateways.
If a touch screen from another manufacturer is used, it must support Elo TouchSystems drivers for
Windows CE 4.2 or later, and can implement any touchscreen technology except APR and
Projected Capacitive.

12.4 Setting Up the Touch Screen for SMP

Gateway HMI Local Display
To learn how to set up a touch screen for your specific SMP Gateway platform, refer to the
corresponding SMP Gateway installation guide (ex. SMP 16 Installation Guide).

78 • Chapter 12: Data Monitoring and Control through the SMP Gateway HMI
12.4.1 Touch Screen Calibration for the SMP Gateway HMI
The touch screen calibration process is exactly the same as for the Annunciator option, and is
performed at the SMP Gateway startup (and restarts).
To learn how to calibrate the touch screen, see “Calibrating the Touch Screen”, page 147.

12.4.2 SMP Gateway HMI Local Display Mouse Support

The SMP Gateway HMI Local Display option supports mouse input, in replacement of touch input
or for use with “non-touch” screens.
Note that touch input always has precedence over mouse input; moreover, input selection occurs
dynamically, which means that if you unplugged the touch input cable of the touch screen from
the SMP Gateway, and connect the mouse to the SMP 16, the mouse cursor will appear on screen
within seconds (i.e. you do not have to restart the SMP Gateway for the change to be effective).

12.5 SMP Gateway Single-Line Diagram Creation

using Visual T&D Diagram Editor
Visual T&D Diagram Editor is required to design SMP Gateway single-line diagrams and export
them to the SMP Gateway HMI Package (.hmi) format, which can be uploaded on the
SMP Gateway.
To learn how to design single-line diagrams using Visual T&D Diagram Editor and export them to
the .hmi format, refer to the Visual T&D Diagram Editor User Guide, S1140-11-1.

12.6 Uploading an SMP Gateway HMI Package File

on the SMP Gateway
SMP Gateway HMI Package (.hmi) files that contain single-line diagrams can be uploaded on the
SMP Gateway using SMP Manager.

Note: Before proceeding with the upload, make sure that the SMP Gateway license is
up-to-date and that it includes the SMP Gateway HMI option; otherwise, the
SMP Gateway will refuse the file.

You must also have Configuration privileges.

To upload an SMP Gateway HMI Package File on the SMP Gateway:

 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateway.
 From the Update menu, choose Send File(s).
 In the Send File window, browse and select the .hmi file that contains the single-line diagram
to load on the SMP Gateway, and then click Open.
 Wait for the file to be transferred on the SMP Gateway.
 Restart the SMP Gateway.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 79

12.7 Accessing the SMP Gateway Single-Line
Diagram Remotely
The SMP Gateway Single-Line Diagram can be displayed remotely, in a Web browser.

To access the SMP Gateway Single-Line Diagram remotely:

 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose Internet Explorer.
 At the home page of the SMP Gateway HMI, click Single-Line Diagram.

Note: You can also start the browser manually and type the IP address of the
SMP Gateway. However, if authentication is active on the SMP Gateway, you will
have to provide the username and password of an SMP Gateway local account
that has the Monitoring privilege to access it (and the Operation privilege, if you
have to perform control operations).

When accessing the SMP Gateway HMI through SMP Manager, the latter
automatically provides the required credentials.

12.8 Accessing the SMP Gateway Annunciator

The SMP Gateway Local HMI provides access to the SMP Gateway Annunciator, when the latter
is configured on the SMP Gateway.

Note: For additional information on the SMP Gateway Annunicator option, refer to
“Using the Annunciator Interface”, page 127.

To access the SMP Gateway Annunciator through the SMP Gateway Local HMI:
 Under Annunciator, click Show annunciator.

The Annunciator window will appear at the middle of the screen.

 To leave the Annunciator and return to the SMP Gateway HMI, just click outside the
Annunciator window.

12.9 Viewing the SMP Gateway Control Log

The SMP Gateway Control log, which provides additional information about control operation
execution, can be consulted via the SMP Gateway HMI display.

To view the Control log from the SMP Gateway HMI display:
 Under Control, click Show log.

12.10 Control Interlock through the SMP Gateway

HMI
A control interlock software mechanism can be implemented in an SMP Gateway HMI single-line
diagram, by adding to a diagram page a button that toggles the control operation mode (local or

80 • Chapter 12: Data Monitoring and Control through the SMP Gateway HMI
 remote) of the SMP Gateway, via a Control interaction on the _smp___setLocalControl
system data point (for additional information, refer to the description of this point in “Appendix A
- System Data Points”, page A-1).
To learn how to set up a Control interaction on a diagram shape, refer to the “Interactions” chapter
of the Visual T&D Diagram Editor User Guide, S1140-11-1.

12.11 Changing SMP Gateway HMI Display

Language
The SMP Gateway HMI is available in English and French.
Remote display language can be changed by changing the language settings of your Web browser.
Local display language can be changed directly from the HMI.

To change the SMP Gateway Local HMI display language:

 In the combo box located in the upper right corner, select français to switch to the French
language, or English to switch to the English language.

The SMP Gateway HMI application will restart with the new language setting.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 81

13 Security

To derive full benefits from IED integration, substation data must be available to users at the
enterprise level. However, widespread data access can become an important security risk if it is
compromised.

13.1 Meeting NERC CIP Requirements

The SMP Gateway helps you meet NERC requirements by providing secure access to substation
devices. Its sophisticated software includes the following security features:
• Authentication and authorization.
Each user is authenticated by the SMP Gateway via a user name and a password. Strong
passwords, individual user accounts, user groups, and detailed group permissions protect
critical system functions from unauthorized access. All access attempts are logged, and some
authentication policies can be defined to lock out specific accounts in the event of consecutive
failed attempts.

Note: This security model can be extended, by purchasing Yukon IED Manager Suite.
See “Extending the SMP Gateway Security Model”, page 86 for details.

• Integrated Firewall.
The SMP Gateway is protected by an integrated firewall, which only allows communications
with specific users, computers and programs, including communications with the SMP Tools,
which goes through a TLS-encrypted access port. This feature limits access to the
SMP Gateway internal components and services.
• Monitoring and locking of remote connections.
Modem and passthrough access is continuously monitored, and can be enabled or disabled by
the control center. All accesses are logged and limited to authorized users.
• Integrity checking.
All SMP Gateway software and firmware components are digitally signed in order to ensure
their authenticity and integrity. All executable files are also continuously monitored to prevent
execution of unauthorized code.

13.1.1 Displaying Appropriate Use Banners

An appropriate use banner can be displayed upon each interactive access attempt to the
SMP Gateway, essentially in the following circumstances:
• At SMP Manager startup;
• In the console of a terminal application, when a user connects to the SMP Gateway
passthrough server command line interface via the passthrough direct access port;

SMP Gateway User Manual • 83

 • In a Web browser, when a user tries to connect the SMP Gateway Web server without
launching the browser from SMP Manager.
By default, no appropriate use banner is configured on the SMP Tools computer and on the
SMP Gateway.

To set up an appropriate use banner:

 Create a text file named Banner.txt. The file should have the following form:

[Title]
<Insert the Appropriate Use Banner dialog box title here.>

[Text]
<Insert the appropriate use banner text here>
 Under Title, type a title for the dialog box that may be used to display the banner.
 Under Text, type the banner text required by the security policies of your company.
 To display the banner only at SMP Manager startup, copy the banner file to the following
folder:

Windows XP:
\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Cooper Power
Systems\SMP Tools

Windows Vista / Windows7:

ProgramData\Cooper Power Systems\SMP Tools

Note: The Application Data (XP) and ProgramData (Vista/7) folders are hidden
by default.

 To display the banner for all other accesses to the SMP Gateway, upload the banner file to the
SMP Gateway:
 In SMP Manager, from the Update menu, choose Send File(s).
 Select the banner text file and click Open.
 Restart the SMP Gateway.
The following screenshot presents an example of an appropriate use banner that is displayed at
SMP Manager startup.

Note: Yukon IED Manager Suite has its own appropriate use banner mechanism, which
overrides the SMP Gateway local banner. Refer to the Yukon IED Manager Suite
documentation for more details.

84 • Chapter 13: Security

13.1.2 Identifying Which Ports are Open in the SMP Gateway
Firewall
When the SMP Gateway integrated firewall is configured and active, access to most
communication ports is blocked. If you have a copy of the SMP Gateway configuration file, you
can open it using SMP Config and navigate through it to find which ports are open in the
integrated firewall, and which ones are not. An easier way to get this information is to look at the
SMP Gateway Security log using SMP Log.

Note: Only users with security management privileges can view the Security log in
SMP Log.

To identify ports those are opened in the SMP Gateway firewall:

 Start SMP Log (see “Viewing the SMP Log Files”, page 45).
 Select the Security folder.

In the right pane, navigate through the various entries until you reach the ones that are time-
stamped at the date and time of the last startup. There should be an entry for each firewall
rule.

13.2 Substation Network Security Considerations

Security, as implemented on the SMP Gateway, is not a substitute for full network security that
includes properly configured firewalls, switches, IDS, IPS, etc. It can be argued that if
unauthorized users get as far as trying out the SMP Gateway security features, there has already
been a security breach at some other level. The goal of the SMP Gateway integrated firewall,
simply stated, is to protect the SMP Gateway internal components and reduce its services’
exposure.

13.2.1 The SMP Gateway Integrated Firewall

The integrated firewall is active by default on a brand new SMP Gateway. Also, when a new
configuration file is created using SMP Config, the integrated firewall is also active in the file.
When activated, the firewall shuts off all the TCP/UDP ports of the SMP Gateway, except for the
following:
• TCP/UDP 6650.
This is the SMP Gateway management port. All the network messages exchanged between
the SMP Gateway and the SMP Tools go through this secure port, and are encrypted using the
Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol (formerly known as Secure Sockets Layer or SSL).

SMP Gateway User Manual • 85

 • TCP 443.
This is the Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS) port, which will
be used by Internet Explorer to access the SMP Gateway Web server.
• UDP 23.
The legacy status server port. Through this port, legacy versions (5.0 or earlier) of
SMP Manager can monitor the status of the SMP Gateway.

Note: Firewall rules can be defined to restrict access through these ports in the firewall.
However, be careful with the 6650 TCP port: if full access is restricted through
this port, you may no longer be able to connect to the SMP Gateway using the
SMP Tools. If this situation happens, refer to “Recovering from a Firewall
Lockout”, page 228, to learn how to fix this issue.

In addition to these ports, you can define additional access rules to allow other applications to
connect to the SMP Gateway, including SCADA and master stations, as described in “Configuring
the Integrated Firewall”, page 98.
The ICMP Ping service is also allowed by default through the firewall.

13.2.2 Using SMP Tools through a Substation LAN Firewall

As described in the previous section, communications between the SMP Tools and SMP Gateways
are made through a single encrypted communication port. Access through this port is permitted in
the integrated firewall, but it must also be granted through the substation LAN firewall. It is also
strongly recommended to open the HTTPS port (TCP 443), to allow access to the SMP Gateway
Web server. Also, if some legacy software is still installed on the some SMP Gateways, the legacy
status server port shall also be opened (UDP 23). This information is summarized in the following
table.

Application Port Protocol

General encrypted communications 6650 TCP /

(SMP Gateway management port) UDP

HTTPS 443 TCP

Legacy status server (optional) 23 UDP

Table 13-1 Ports to open for SMP Tools usage in a substation LAN firewall

Prior to version 5.1 of the SMP Gateway software & tools, SMP Tools used Microsoft DCOM
technology, instead of a single encrypted access port. Additional ports were also used, for Telnet
communications and File Transfer Protocol (FTP) exchanges. As it is possible to use some
functionality of the legacy versions of the SMP Tools with the recent gateway software, and recent
versions of the SMP Tools with legacy gateway software, backward compatibility issues are
discussed in the “Legacy SMP Gateway Software and Tools Compatibility” section, page 104.

13.3 Extending the SMP Gateway Security Model

The SMP Gateway security model is effective “locally”: security settings are stored in the
SMP Gateway, which is also responsible for security processes like authentication, and features
such as the firewall and VPN connections.

86 • Chapter 13: Security

 You may extend the SMP Gateway security model by purchasing the IMS Security Server, which
is part of Yukon IED Manager Suite. The IMS Security Server provides a global security model,
bringing it up to the corporate level and increasing access rights control and flexibility.

Note: The IMS Security Server global security model is out of the scope of this
document. For more information, contact your local Cooper Power Systems
representative.

13.4 SMP Gateway Authentication Policy

Every utility defines its own set of security policies, including one for authentication.
The SMP Gateway authentication policy specifies the login requirements a user must meet in
order to get access to the SMP Gateway services and information. It also defines user account
lockout mechanisms.
SMP Manager allows you to specify the SMP Gateway authentication policy based on your own
policy, in order to apply it to the user accounts and passwords that you will define in the
SMP Gateway local security database. The policy itself is also stored in the SMP Gateway as part
of its security database

13.4.1 Defining the SMP Gateway Authentication Policy

The SMP Gateway authentication policy must first be defined at the creation of the SMP Gateway
security database. It can also be modified at a later time.

To define the authentication policy of an SMP Gateway for the very first time:
 From the Security menu of SMP Manager, choose Edit Local Security Database.

 In the Description box under Security Configuration, type a short description for the
security database of the SMP Gateway; this description will appear at the top of the Local
Security Database Editor window.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 87

  Under Password, specify the requirements that passwords must meet when they are entered:
 In the Minimum password length box, specify the minimum number of characters that a
password must contain.
 Select Password must meet complexity requirements if the password must contain at
least one character from each of the following categories:
• English alphabetic (a through z or A through Z)
• Numerals (0 through 9)
• Non-alphanumerical (such as !, $, # or %, for example)
 Under Account lock, specifies whether a user account is to be locked out from SMP Gateway
access if the user fails to log in properly and if so, what are the locking and unlocking
parameters:
 If a user account must be locked out when the user fails to log in properly, select Enable
account lock. The two parameters that follow define the locking and unlocking rules.

Note: User accounts of the Administrators group may only be locked out if the Enable
SMP Gateway administrator account lock is also selected (see below).

 To automatically unlock an account a certain amount of time (as defined by the Remove
lockout after setting that follows), select Activate automatic account unlock.
 To also allow administrator accounts to be locked out, select Enable SMP Gateway
administrator account lock and specify the amount of time such accounts will be locked
out in the Remove administrator lockout after box.
Click OK.

The Local Security Database Editor window appears and you are ready to define users and
groups (see “The SMP Gateway Security Database”, page 89).

To modify the authentication policy of an SMP Gateway on subsequent occasions:

 Log into SMP Manager with an authorized username and password.
 From the Security menu, select Edit Local Security Database.
 From the Security menu of the Local Security Database Editor window, choose
Authentication Policy.
 Modify the authentication policy to suit your needs, and then click OK.

The description of the security database appears in the title bar of the Local Security
Database Editor window, and the authentication policy will go into effect as soon as it will
be sent to the concerned SMP Gateway(s).

13.5 Changing the Current Login in SMP Manager

If the Login Information window is not displayed upon startup, here is how you can access it:
 From the Security menu, choose Change Current Login.

88 • Chapter 13: Security

  Enter the credentials of the SMP Gateway local account you want to use, for this
SMP Manager session, to authenticate with all SMP Gateways, and then click OK.

13.6 The SMP Gateway Security Database

The SMP Gateway Security Database contains the authentication policy that applies to a given
SMP Gateway, along with the list of user accounts that have access to the SMP Gateway. The
copy of the security database that is stored locally, on the same PC as the SMP Tools, is called the
local security database.
SMP Gateway access depends on the level of privileges that is granted to user groups that a given
user account belongs to.
New user groups and accounts can be created, renamed and deleted. Some restrictions apply to
administrator groups and accounts. It is not possible to create new privileges.
The local security database is the
In this section, you will learn how to perform the following operations:
• Access the Local Security Database Editor.
• Manage the list of user groups and user accounts.
• Grant privileges to user groups.
• Change the password of user accounts.
• Validate and upload the local security database to SMP Gateways.
• Deactivate local authentication.

13.6.1 Default Groups and Privileges

In the following table, you will find default user groups and privileges. You can change group
privileges at will; of course, you have to upload the security database to the SMP Gateway
afterwards.

Note: If you remove privileges, you must notify the concerned groups or users;
otherwise, they will fill up the security log with access denial messages if they
keep trying to access the gateway.

Privilege Description Groups

Security Update security database: users, groups, and Administrators

Management privileges; unlock user accounts; access to
Security and Firewall logs.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 89

 Privilege Description Groups

System Management Update firmware, software, license and Administrators

components; configure redundancy, VPN, RAS,
and SNMP; console access.

Configuration Update the SMP Gateway configuration file. Administrators,

technicians.

Read only Read the SMP Gateway configuration file only. Administrators,
technicians, operators.

Diagnostic Use the SMP Gateway diagnostics tools: Administrators,

SMP Log, SMP Trace and SMP Stats. technicians, operators.

Device maintenance Perform direct IED maintenance via Administrators,

passthrough connections (SMP Connect). protection engineers.

Monitoring Monitor and obtain Web access to the Administrators,

SMP Gateway central database. technicians, operators,
guests.

Operation Perform control, tag management and force Administrators,

operation on I/O points; use the commissioning operators.
tool.

Remote access Obtain remote access via dial-up or VPN. Administrators,

technicians, protection
engineers, operators.

Table 13-2 Privileges assigned to groups by default

13.6.2 Accessing the Local Security Database Editor

Initially, the local security database includes the following elements:
• One predefined user account, namely an administrator with full privileges.
• 5 predefined user groups, each with predefined privileges.

Privileges are described in the “Default Groups and Privileges” section, page 89.
You can edit the user groups and user accounts using the Local Security Database Editor.

To access the Local Security Database Editor:

 From the Security menu of SMP Manager, choose Edit Local Security Database.

The Local Security Database Editor window appears. If you click a user group in the left
pane, the right pane shows the privileges assigned to this group and gives a description of
each privilege.

90 • Chapter 13: Security

13.6.3 Managing the List of User Groups
The Local Security Database Editor allows users to create new user groups, to rename them, or
delete them.

To create a new user group:

 From the Group menu of the Local Security Database Editor window, choose New.
 Type the name of the new group, and then press ENTER.

To rename a user group:

 In the left pane of the Local Security Database Editor window, select the group to rename.
 From the Group menu, choose Rename.
 Type the new name, and then press ENTER.

Note: You cannot rename the Administrators user group.

To delete a user group:

 In the left pane of the Local Security Database Editor window, select the group to delete.
 From the Group menu, choose Delete.

You will be advised if there are any users assigned to the group you are about to delete.

Note: You cannot delete the Administrators user group.

13.6.4 Granting Privileges to a User Group

Privileges are not granted to individual users, but to groups. User accounts are then assigned to the
groups that correspond to their roles.

Note: You cannot create, delete or rename privileges. However, you can choose which
predefined privileges you want to assign to a particular group.

To grant privileges to a user group:

 In the left pane of the Local Security Database Editor window, select the group.
 In the right pane, select desired privileges’ check boxes for this group.
 Clear other privileges’ check boxes.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 91

13.6.5 Managing the List of User Accounts
The Local Security Database Editor allows users to create new user accounts, to rename them, or
delete them.

Note: The Administrator user cannot be deleted, but it should be renamed the first
time you edit the security database, because the name is so revealing that it
exposes the account to brute force attacks.

Note that the Administrator user account is identified by a different icon.

To create a new user account:

 From the User menu of the Local Security Database Editor window, choose New.
 Type the name of the new user, and then press ENTER.

To rename a user:
 In the left pane of the Local Security Database Editor window, select the user to rename.
 From the User menu, choose Rename.
 Type the new user name, and then press ENTER.

To delete a user:
 In the left pane of the Local Security Database Editor window, click the user to delete.
 From the User menu, choose Delete.

13.6.6 Setting the Password of a User Account

Each user account defined in the security database must have its own different password, based on
the authentication policy defined for the SMP Gateway.

To assign a password to a new user or to change the password of an existing user:

 In the left pane of the Local Security Database Editor window, select the user.
 From the User menu, choose Set Password.
 In the Set Password window, type and confirm the new password.

13.6.7 Assigning a User Account to Groups

Privileges are granted to groups, not to users. As a result, you must assign a user account to one or
more user groups.

To assign a user account to one or more user groups:

 In the left pane, select the user.
 In the right pane, select the groups the user will be assigned to.

For example, in the following illustration, the user named “Matt” is assigned to the
Protection Engineers group.

92 • Chapter 13: Security

13.6.8 Validating the Local Security Database
The local security database, which includes your authentication policy and the users and groups
you have defined, is automatically validated and stored locally on your PC when you close the
Local Security Database Editor window.
However, if you want to manually validate your security database without closing the window,
proceed as follows:
 In the Local Security Database Editor window, from the Security menu, choose Check
Validity.

This will compare your security parameters, such as passwords, with the authentication policy
that you defined beforehand.

13.6.9 The SMP Gateway Security Database Status

In SMP Manager, the Security column indicates if local authentication or IMS (“global”)
authentication is active on each SMP Gateway. If the user also has security management
privileges, it also displays the status of the local security database that is currently active the
SMP Gateway.
Here is an explanation of the different values that may be displayed for local authentication and
the security database, followed by suggestions of actions to take, if any:
• Up to Date.
The security database on the SMP Gateway is the same as the local security database that is
currently active on your PC. This is the normal case.
• Older (date and time).
You sent a security database to the SMP Gateway, but subsequently modified the local
security database. Therefore, the security database on the SMP Gateway is older than your
local security database.
• Newer (date and time).
You sent a security database to the SMP Gateway, but someone on another PC subsequently
modified his or her own local security database and sent it to the SMP Gateway.
• n/a.
The software installed on the SMP Gateway does not support the authentication features.

If the SMP Gateway contains an older security database:

 Send your local security database to the SMP Gateway. The Status column will now display
Local: Up to Date.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 93

 If the SMP Gateway contains a newer security database:
 Contact the person who manages this SMP Gateway configuration, to determine if the
changes are appropriate.
 If you agree:
 Retrieve the security database from the SMP Gateway in order to update your own local
security database.

The Status column will now display Local: Up to Date.

 Otherwise (if the modifications should not have been made):
 Send your own local security database to the SMP Gateway.

The Status column will now display Local: Up to Date.

13.6.10 Uploading the Local Security Database on SMP Gateways

The local security database, which includes your authentication policies, users and groups, is
stored locally on your PC.
To activate local authentication based on these settings on one or more SMP Gateways, you must
upload your local security database on these SMP Gateways.
Only users with security management privileges can update the local security database of an
SMP Gateway.

To upload the local security database on SMP Gateways:

 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateways on which you want to upload the local security
database.
 From the Security menu, choose Update SMP Gateway Security Database.

SMP Manager encrypts the information, and then sends the configuration to the
SMP Gateway(s).
If the user has security management privileges, the Security column indicates if the security
database of each SMP Gateway in the list matches the local security database currently stored on
the PC.
Otherwise, the Security column only displays whether authentication is active, or not, on the
gateway, without telling if the local security database is up-to-date.

13.6.11 Retrieving an Existing Security Database from an

SMP Gateway
You may want to replace your current local security database with the security database that is
currently loaded on a specific SMP Gateway.

To retrieve the security database of an SMP Gateway:

 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateway.
 From the Security menu, choose Get SMP Gateway Local Security Database.

SMP Manager retrieves the file from the SMP Gateway and upon your approval, replaces
your local security database with the one retrieved from the SMP Gateway.

94 • Chapter 13: Security

13.6.12 Exporting the Local Security Database
There are two reasons why you may want to export your local security database to a file:
• To create a backup copy.
• To transfer your security database from one PC to another.

To export the local security database to a file:

 In SMP Manager, choose Edit Local Security Database from the Security menu.
 In the Local Security Database Editor window, choose Send to File from the Security
menu.
 In the Send Security to File window, specify a file name and click Save.
 Close the Local Security Database Editor window.

13.6.13 Uploading a Previously Saved Security Database

Let us suppose that an authorized person in your organization updated the local security database
on his or her PC, and sent you a copy of the security database file.

To load this new security database onto one or more SMP Gateways:
 Retrieve the file:
 From the Security menu of the Local Security Database Editor window, choose Get
from File.
 In the Get Security From File window, specify the file name and click Open.

The retrieved file now becomes the currently active local security database.
 Close the Local Security Database Editor window.
 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateway(s) to which you want to send the security
database.
 From the Security menu, choose Update SMP Gateway Security Database.

13.6.14 Deactivating Local Authentication on SMP Gateways

If you want to deactivate local authentication on an SMP Gateway, you must remove its security
database.

To remove the security database from one or more SMP Gateway(s):

 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateways from which you want to remove the security
database.
 From the Security menu, choose Remove Security Database from SMP Gateway.

Note: If IMS authentication is active on the SMP Gateway, the Remove Security
Database from SMP Gateway command will be unavailable. If you really want to
deactivate local authentication on the SMP Gateway, you must first deactivate
IMS authentication.

Refer to the IED Manager Suite SMP Gateway Integration Guide, S1130-12-1.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 95

 Once you have confirmed your intention and the security database has been removed, the Security
column in SMP Manager now displays the following status for the SMP Gateway(s) you selected:

Local: Disabled

Note: Removing the security database only deactivates the authentication policy, user
accounts and groups. Other security features, such as integrity checking, firewall
and VPN management, are still active.

You can reactivate local authentication of one or more SMP Gateways by sending them your local
security database, as described under “Uploading the Local Security Database on SMP Gateways”,
page 94.

13.7 User Account Lockout

An account is locked out when a user attempts to authenticate using this account, but provides an
invalid password a certain number of times over a specific period of time. These lockout settings
are specified in the SMP Gateway authentication policy, as explained in the “SMP Gateway
Authentication Policy” section, page 87.
Locked-out accounts cannot be used to authenticate with the SMP Gateway until they are
unlocked. They can be unlocked automatically after a certain period of time; otherwise, they must
be unlocked manually by a system administrator.
Administrator accounts may also be subject to account lockout, as specified, or not, in the
SMP Gateway authentication policy.

13.7.1 Unlocking User Accounts

Security management privileges are required to unlock user accounts.

To unlock one or more user accounts:

 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateway for which you want to perform the unlock
operation.
 From the Security menu, choose Unlock User Account.

 Select Unlock all accounts.

OR

Select Unlock specific account, and specify the account in the User Name box.
 Click Unlock to unlock the account(s), and then click Close.

96 • Chapter 13: Security

13.8 The SMP Gateway Security Log
If you have security management privileges, you can view the security log and see all security-
related events, including:
• All authentications, whether granted or refused.
• All user account locks and unlocks.
• All configuration, maintenance, and security management activities.
• All console, Web and passthrough server accesses.
• Integrity check status information.
• Security server status information.
• All ports those are open in the SMP Gateway integrated firewall.

13.8.1 Viewing the Security Log

Security management privileges are required to view the Security log in SMP Log. If you do not
have sufficient privileges, this log folder will not appear in SMP Log.

To view the security log:

 From the Tools menu of SMP Manager, choose SMP Log.
 In the SMP Log application window, click the Security folder in the left pane.

The security-related events will appear in the right pane.

13.9 File Certification and Integrity Checking

All executable files on the SMP Gateway and all SMP Tools are digitally signed to ensure that
they originate from Cooper Power Systems. A digital fingerprint is encrypted and inserted in the
file at the factory.
Whenever you upload a file to the SMP Gateway, SMP Manager or SMP Loader performs an
integrity check on the file. Furthermore, a continuous integrity check is performed on the
SMP Gateway at all times, to detect whether any executable file has been tampered with by a virus
or if an unauthorized file has been loaded via an unconventional method.
Once you have uploaded a version of the SMP Gateway software that includes file integrity
checking to the SMP Gateway, you cannot use a previous uncertified version of the SMP Gateway
software, or a version of the SMP Tools that use uncertified files, since they would fail the
integrity checks.

13.9.1 Detecting an Integrity Check Failure

If a file fails the integrity check, the SMP Gateway restarts and goes into “safe mode”, in which
there is no communication between the devices and the SMP Gateway.
You can detect this situation as follows:
• In the SMP Manager window, the Status column shows that the SMP Gateway is in “Safe
mode”.
• All device points are tagged with a communications failure attribute. A series of alarms are
generated, at the SCADA level or in a local HMI.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 97

 • The Reset log indicates that the integrity check function has restarted the SMP Gateway in
safe mode.
• The Security log contains an entry indicating when the problem was detected, and several
entries identifying which files failed the integrity check. It can take up to 5 minutes for all
entries to appear in the log.

13.9.2 Recovering from an Integrity Failure

Windows CE, which is installed in the SMP Gateway, is the software responsible for the integrity
check. If the gateway goes into safe mode, it means that the gateway application needs to be
updated to match Windows CE.

To recover from an integrity failure:

 Update the SMP Gateway application on the SMP Gateway, as described in “Updating the
SMP Gateway Application”, page 206.
 If the SMP Gateway goes into safe mode after the update, contact Cooper Power Systems’
Technical Support (see “Getting Assistance”, page 2).

13.10 Configuring the Integrated Firewall

This section describes how to configure the firewall, as well as the various related options that are
offered.
Some pre-defined settings open a few ports in the integrated firewall, as described in the section
entitled “The SMP Gateway Integrated Firewall”, page 85. The following sections explain how to
modify these settings to allow access to the SMP Gateway applications and services.

13.10.1 Specifying Firewall Rules

Firewall rules includes specific services that are allowed, or not, through the firewall. Custom
rules can also be defined to open, or not, additional port(s), or to allow access to applications from
specific computers or subnets.

To modify services access through the firewall:

 In SMP Config, expand the Firewall branch, and then the Rules branch.

At the top of the right pane, a list of services is displayed.

 To allow a service through the firewall, select Allow.

 To restrict access to a specific computer of subnet, select the appropriate setting in the
Accessible From cell and enter the name or address of the computer/subnet in the Specific
Computer or Subnet cell.

98 • Chapter 13: Security

 Note: If you plan to use legacy versions of the SMP Tools to monitor SMP Gateways
with recent software installed, access must be given to the Legacy Status
Server service. Otherwise, the legacy SMP Manager will not be able to monitor
the gateway status. Moreover, depending on the strategy used to address DCOM
access to the SMP Gateway, access to the VPN service may also be required. If
VPN is not an option, a final alternative is the definition of all ports, including
those used by DCOM, as custom firewall access rules. To learn how to define
custom firewall access rules, see below.

For more information regarding legacy software versions compatibility, see

“Legacy SMP Gateway Software and Tools Compatibility”, page 104.

If a service is not present in the list, refer to “Restricting Access to Other Services”, page 100, to
see if access is not configured somewhere else in SMP Config. If it is still not the case, a custom
firewall rule must be defined.

To define a custom firewall access rule:

 In SMP Config, expand the Firewall branch, and then the Rules branch.

At the bottom of the right pane, a list of custom rules is displayed. Note that no custom rule is
defined by default.

 Click in the Name cell, and then type a short name to briefly describe the rule you are about
to define.
 Select Allow to allow access.

OR

Clear the Allow check box to restrict access.

 Select the protocol (either TCP/IP or UDP/IP).
 In the Port Range cell, enter the number(s) of the port(s) for which you want to
permit/restrict access. You can enter multiple ports, separated by commas. Port ranges are
defined using a dash: for example, 1270-1280 means that the rule applies to all ports between
and including ports 1270 and 1280.
 If the rule applies to a specific computer or subnet, enter this information in the Accessible
From and Specific Computer or Subnet cell.
 In the Description cell, you can enter additional information to further describe the rule. This
field is optional.

To delete a rule:
 Click in the row. You will see an arrow on the left side of that row.
 Click the arrow and press the Delete key.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 99

13.10.2 Restricting Access to Other Services
Access to some of the SMP Gateway services and applications through the integrated firewall is
not configured in the System/Firewall branch.
TCP/IP and UDP/IP slave connections are automatically allowed through the integrated firewall,
but access can be restricted to specific computers or subnets, as described in the “Setting up a
TCP/IP Slave Connection” section, page 64, and in the “Setting up a UDP/IP Slave Connection”
section, page 65.
The same applies to the SNTP server and the Passthrough Direct Access Port, when configured.
To learn how to restrict access to the SNTP server from specific computers or subnets, see
“Setting up the SMP Gateway to Act as an SNTP Server”, page 185. For the Passthrough Direct
Access Port, refer to the technical note entitled Using the SMP Gateway Passthrough Command
Line Interface, AUT-00316-00059 T.

13.10.3 Deactivating the Integrated Firewall

For some reasons, the integrated firewall might not be required on the SMP Gateway.

To disable the integrated firewall:

 From SMP Config, under the System branch, select Firewall, and then General.

 Clear the Enabled check box.

13.10.4 Disabling the Firewall Log

All firewall activities are logged in the Firewall log, which can be accessed using the SMP Log
tool. If for some reasons, firewall activities logging is not required, this feature can be deactivated
as follow:
 From SMP Config, under the System branch, select Firewall, and then General.
 Clear the Log Enabled check box.

100 • Chapter 13: Security

13.11 Device Account Password Management
When connecting to a specific device, the SMP Gateway may have to provide account
information, such as a login name or a password. Such information is usually specified at
configuration time, in the SMP Gateway configuration (PAR) file, using SMP Config.
If the corresponding account changes on the device, the SMP Gateway configuration must be
updated with the new account information. However, this approach requires an SMP Gateway
restart, which may not be appropriate in some situations.
For some protocols and services, it is now possible to change these passwords at runtime, using
SMP Manager, without having to change the SMP Gateway configuration.
This feature is made possible through the SMP Gateway password secure store, and requires the
Security Management privilege.

Note: The device account password management feature cannot change the password
of the corresponding devices themselves. For that matter, you must either
perform the change manually using the corresponding native vendor tool (locally
or through a passthrough connection), or use the Password Manager application
of IED Manager Suite.

For additional information about IED Manager Suite and Password Manager,
contact your Cooper Power Systems sales representative.

13.11.1 The SMP Gateway Password Secure Store

The SMP Gateway password secure store is a central repository for account information used by
various SMP Gateway components, notably master protocols, to communicate with devices or
master stations.
When a protocol instance or any other component that supports this feature is started for the first
time by the SMP Gateway application, an account entry is added to the secure store. The password
of this account entry can then be updated at runtime, using SMP Manager, without having to
change the SMP Gateway configuration.
This secure store entry will not be used until it is first updated through SMP Manager, which
means that you will still be able to update the corresponding passwords using SMP Config.
However, as soon as you update this account password in the SMP Gateway secure store, the
corresponding component will no longer look in the SMP Gateway configuration file for this
password (for obvious security reasons) even if it is updated in the SMP Gateway
configuration file.
Once an account entry exists in the secure store for a specific device or service, it cannot be
deleted as long as the corresponding component instance exists in the SMP Gateway
configuration.

13.11.2 Updating an Account Password in the SMP Gateway

Secure Store
This procedure explains how to update an account password in the SMP Gateway secure store, in
order to override the current password specified for this account in the SMP Gateway
configuration (PAR) file at configuration time.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 101

 Note: This update has not effect on the actual account password stored in the device
itself.

Moreover, if you update an account password directly in the SMP Gateway

secure store, you will no longer be able to update it through the SMP Gateway
configuration file.

To update an account password in the SMP Gateway secure store:

 Start SMP Manager.
 Select the SMP Gateway to update.
 From the Security menu, choose Update Device Accounts.

 Select the account to update, and then click Modify.

 Enter the new password twice, and then click OK.

 Click Yes to confirm.
 Once the update operation is completed, click OK to close the confirmation window, and
close the Update Device Accounts window.

13.11.3 Deleting an Account Password from the SMP Gateway

Secure Store
The following procedure explains how to delete an account entry from the SMP Gateway secure
store when it is no longer used (e.g. the corresponding master protocol instance was deleted from
the configuration).

102 • Chapter 13: Security

 To delete an account password from the SMP Gateway secure store:
 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateway to update.
 From the Security menu, choose Update Device Accounts.
 Select the account to update, and then click Delete.

Note: You cannot delete an account password that is currently in use.

 Click Yes to confirm.

 Once the delete operation is completed, click OK to close the confirmation window, and close
the Update Device Accounts window.

13.12 Locking Passthrough and Incoming RAS

Connections
Passthrough connections between the SMP Gateway and the devices, and incoming RAS dialup
connections to the SMP Gateway, represent yet another possible security threat to the
SMP Gateway.

Note: For more information about passthrough connections, see “Using Passthrough
Connections”, page 109.

For more information about RAS dialup connections, see “SMP Tools Remote
Access to the SMP Gateway”, page 187.

The control center can lock all incoming RAS dialup connections, as well as individual
passthrough connections, using some of the SMP Gateway system data points. These system data
points are presented in “Appendix A - System Data Points”, page A-1.
The following sections explain the various methods available to lock/unlock RAS/passthrough
connections.

13.12.1 Locking or Unlocking a Passthrough Connection

The control center can lock or unlock passthrough connections individually, and can also request
that a particular passthrough connection be automatically locked or unlocked on SMP Gateway
startup.

To lock or unlock a passthrough connection:

 From the SCADA, perform the OPEN or CLOSE operation on the
_smp___passthru<connection>Enable data point. You can do a Direct Execute or
a Select Before Operate (SBO). For additional information on how to perform control
operations using Visual T&D Explorer, refer to Visual T&D Explorer User Manual, S1140-
10-1.

To request that a particular passthrough connection be locked or unlocked on

SMP Gateway startup:
 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Config.
 In the left pane, expand the Passthrough branch, and then select the Connections branch.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 103

  In the right pane, select the passthrough connection, and then either select or clear the Locked
at Startup check box.

13.12.2 Locking or Unlocking All Incoming RAS Dialup

Connections
The control center can lock all incoming RAS dialup connections at any time, regardless of
whether or not there is communication in progress. When the SMP Gateway restarts, RAS dialup
connections’ lock information is preserved.
There are 2 ways to lock or unlock incoming RAS dialup connections:

Method 1- Through SMP Console and using the RAS Manager utility program:
 In the SMP Manager window, select the SMP Gateway and start a console session.
 Type the command that starts the RAS manager:

RASMGR
 Type the command that toggles between locking and unlocking incoming dialup connections:

X
The following example illustrates how you can lock, and then unlock RAS dialup connections.
(H) Help, (Q) Quit [h]: x

Do you want to lock the incoming dialup connections? [N]: y

The incoming dialup connections are now locked.

(H) Help, (Q) Quit [h]: x

Do you want to unlock the incoming dialup connections? [Y]: n

The incoming dialup connections are now unlocked.

Method 2 – By performing a control operation on a system data point:

 From the control center or a local HMI (such as Visual T&D), perform the OPEN or CLOSE
operation on the _smp___dialupEnable data point. You can do a Direct Execute or a
Select-Before-Operate (SBO).

13.13 Security-Related System Data Points

The SMP Gateway store some security-related statuses and data into system data points. These
points are listed in “Appendix A - System Data Points”, page A-1.

13.14 Legacy SMP Gateway Software and Tools

Compatibility
As stated earlier in this document, prior to version 5.1 of the SMP Gateway software & tools,
SMP Tools used Microsoft DCOM technology, instead of a single encrypted access port.
Additional ports were also opened for Telnet communications and FTP exchanges.

104 • Chapter 13: Security

 It is possible to use the latest versions of the SMP Tools with legacy SMP Gateway software.
Additional firewall configuration work is required both for the SMP Gateway integrated firewall,
and at the substation level.
Legacy scenarios are explained in further details below.

13.14.1 Accessing SMP Gateways with Legacy Software Installed

There are two strategies available to use the SMP Tools through a substation firewall:
• The most secure approach is to establish a VPN (Virtual Private Network) connection
between the substation LAN and the client workstations on the corporate LAN. A VPN
encapsulates and encrypts network messages before forwarding them to the recipient. You
will not need any special setup when installing the SMP Tools. This approach will also secure
access by any other tools.
• If you cannot use a VPN, you will need to open the necessary ports for DCOM and other
SMP Gateway services on the firewalls and routers that connect to the substation LAN.
Here is the list of ports and port ranges that you have to open in the substation LAN firewall, to let
a PC on one side of the firewall communicate with an SMP Gateway on the other side of the
firewall:

Application Port Protocol

FTP server 21 TCP

Telnet 23 TCP

SMP Gateway status 23 UDP

Web server 80, 443 TCP

RPC server and 135 TCP

DCOM

DCOM 1024 to 65535 TCP

SMP Gateway 49152 TCP

maintenance server

Table 13-3 Ports to open in a substation LAN firewall, when not using VPN

Application Port Protocol

SNMP server 161 UDP

SNMP traps 162 UDP

SNTP server 123 TCP

CoDeSys server 1200 TCP

Passthrough direct 32500 TCP

access port (configurable)

Table 13-4 Optional ports to open in a substation LAN firewall, regardless of VPN usage

SMP Gateway User Manual • 105

 Application Port Protocol

SMP Gateway status 23 UDP

PPTP (VPN) 1723 TCP and UDP

PPTP (VPN) - GRE

Table 13-5 Ports to open in a substation LAN firewall, when using VPN

Protocol Port

DNP3 20000

IEC 60870-5-104/103 2404

IEC 61850 102

ICCP 102

MODBUS 502

Table 13-6 Ports that are commonly used for RTU/SCADA communications

If you configured system folders on your SMP Gateway and the Windows firewall is active on
your PC, you must also open the following ports:
• 445 (TCP protocol).
• 137, 138 and 139 (UDP protocol), if you are running NETBIOS on your network.

Note: This configuration will work only if your network does not use address translation.
Check with your network administrator.

13.14.2 Using Legacy SMP Tools with Recent SMP Gateway

Software
In such a situation, the following message is displayed in SMP Manager in the Status column, for
the recent SMP Gateways:

SSL required- Upgrade to SMP Tools X.Y

This means that the SMP Gateway software was updated to use the single encrypted access port,
rather than DCOM, to communicate with SMP Tools.
Cooper Power Systems strongly recommends upgrading legacy SMP Tools to the latest
version.

13.14.3 Using Recent SMP Tools with Legacy SMP Gateway

Software
If a recent version of any SMP Tool tries to connect to an SMP Gateway installed with legacy
application and firmware, it automatically uses the required protocols and ports (DCOM, FTP and
Telnet). No additional configuration work is required.

106 • Chapter 13: Security

13.14.4 Using VPN Connections
SMP Tools version 5.0 and earlier used several TCP/UDP ports. If any tool tried to connect to an
SMP Gateway configured with the firewall, the tool automatically established a VPN connection
to the gateway.
There are still some cases where you want to set up and use a VPN connection manually, which is
the subject of the next section.

Note: You will not be able to establish a VPN connection between a Windows 7
computer and an SMP Gateway if local authentication is not activated on the
gateway.

13.14.4.1 Manually Setting Up a VPN Connection

As seen previously, VPN connections are automatically established by the SMP Tools 5.0 or
earlier when they connect to an SMP Gateway secured by its integrated firewall. For some
reasons, you still may need to set up and use a VNP connection manually.

Note: To manually set up a VPN connection, the user must have the System
Management privilege for the SMP Gateway.

To manually set up and use a VPN connection:

 In SMP Manager, select the gateway for which you want to configure a VPN connection from
your PC.
 From the Gateway menu, choose Connect Through VPN.
 What happens when you click this function the first time is:
 It creates a new connection in the Network Connections view of Windows’ Control
Panel.
 In SMP Manager, in the VPN column for the selected gateway, you will see the
Connecting… status message, then Connected.
 In Windows, open the Start menu, and navigate up to the following menu:

\All Programs\Accessories\Communications
 Select Network Connections.

You will now see a new icon named after your gateway, under Virtual Private Network.
 You are now ready to use your tool/application through the VPN connection.

Note: Microsoft Windows© XP only allows 2 outgoing VPN connections simultaneously.

To disconnect from the VPN:

 From the Gateway menu, choose Disconnect VPN.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 107

14 Using Passthrough
Connections

Most manufacturers of recent IEDs provide native vendor tools (NVT) for the configuration and
maintenance of their devices. These tools usually connect to the device using a serial link or, less
frequently, a network connection.
The optional SMP Gateway passthrough feature gives you the ability to use PC-based tools to
access the devices connected to an SMP Gateway. With this feature, the SMP Gateway serves as a
terminal server for remote maintenance, monitoring and control of the connected devices.

14.1 Principles of Operation

Most native vendor tools expect IEDs to be connected to serial ports on the PC. Since IEDs are
now connected to the SMP Gateway instead, the passthrough function has to intercept this
communications link and provide a mechanism to exchange data between the NVT and the
SMP Gateway.
The passthrough functionality is implemented by two software components: the SMP Connect
windows application, which is part of the SMP Tools suite, and the SMP Gateway Passthrough
Server. An overview of the passthrough functionality is presented in the illustration that follows.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 109

 Figure 14-1 The passthrough process explained

A virtual loopback connection must be set up between SMP Connect and the NVT. This allows
SMP Connect to intercept the communications link from the maintenance or configuration tool,
and forward the data to the SMP Gateway. The SMP Gateway passthrough server then forwards
the data to the device via a serial link. The result is that maintenance and configuration tools can
operate as if the device were directly connected to the PC.
While the PC application is communicating with the IED or RTU, the latter may have to suspend
its data acquisition; depending on the serial link and device type involved, it may be necessary for
all devices on the link to suspend their data acquisition, even though only one device is engaged in
communications with the PC application. This suspension is illustrated using a red “X” in Figure
14-1.
SMP Connect terminates the passthrough connection if a problem arises or if there is no data
exchanged during a specified timeout period.

110 • Chapter 14: Using Passthrough Connections

14.1.1 The Direct Access Port and the Command Line Interface
Passthrough connectivity with SMP Connect requires human intervention. To establish
passthrough connections using automated scripts, the SMP Gateway Passthrough Server command
line interface must be used. This interface is available through the Passthrough Direct Access Port.
For more information on this specific passthrough feature, refer to the Using the SMP Gateway
Passthrough Command Line Interface technical note, AUT-00316-00059 T.

14.2 Setting up Passthrough Connections

Setting up a passthrough connection involves a number of steps.
• Using SMP Config, you identify the devices that will be accessed through passthrough
connections. For each device, you provide information such as the SMP Gateway port to be
used for the passthrough connection, and the timeout after which the passthrough connection
is to be terminated after the last data exchange.
• In SMP Connect, you identify each application that will communicate with a device via a
passthrough connection. For each of these applications, you specify the type of loopback
connection to be established between SMP Connect and the application, and you define the
communications settings of the loopback connection.

14.2.1 Defining SMP Gateway Passthrough Settings

Using SMP Config, define the SMP Gateway passthrough settings for each device that will be
using a passthrough connection:
 In the left pane, click Passthrough, and then click Connections.

 Create a new connection by entering the following information in the empty row:
• IED Name.
This name will be used to identify the device in the SMP Connect program. You should
use the same name that you assigned to the device when configuring the master protocol
component that it communicates with.
• Connection.
Choose the serial port or the TCP/IP connection that links the SMP Gateway to the
configuration port of the device. Some devices use separate configuration and data ports.
If it is the case, you must use two separate cables to connect the device to the
SMP Gateway and specify here the port that will be used by the IED maintenance and/or
configuration programs; otherwise, the port must be the same as the one used by the
master protocol.

Note: Encrypted master TCP/IP connections cannot be used for passthrough, as it is

assumed that the NVT already encrypts communications if required by the IED.

To learn how to deactivate encryption for a given master connection, see

“Configuring TCP/IP Master Connections”, page 36.

• Usage.
This setting allows special passthrough usage, in configurations where multiple

SMP Gateway User Manual • 111

 simultaneous connections are required, or when the client application uses a protocol that
requires additional processing from the passthrough server. The following options are
available:
• Telnet.
Select this value if the client application uses the Telnet protocol to communicate
with the IED
• FTP.
Select this value if the client application uses the FTP protocol to exchange files with
the IED.
• SMP Tools.
Select this value to define a passthrough connection that will be used to monitor the
status and activity of another SMP gateway, using the various SMP Tools such as
SMP Manager, SMP Trace and SMP Log.
• Web.
Select this value if the client application is browser-based and uses a Web browser to
communicate with the IED.
• Normal.
Select this value for standard passthrough usage.

Note: Only Normal usage is supported for serial passthrough connections.

Moreover, if the direct access port is enabled on the SMP Gateway, it is not
possible to define passthrough connections for any other usage than Normal.

• Connection Count.
This setting indicates the number of simultaneous passthrough connections that are
required for the Usage specified. In most cases, the Default value is appropriate for this
setting, because the corresponding number of connections that will be created by the
passthrough server is function of that usage.

However, if connectivity or performance issues are encountered, try some specific values
instead of Default.

Note: One typical example is the use of the Mozilla Firefox and Google Chrome
browser, which require more simultaneous connections than Microsoft Internet
Explorer. As the default connection count is based on Internet Explorer
requirements, a custom value may be required if another web browser is used.

• Suspend Link.
This setting indicates that data acquisition should be suspended for all other devices
sharing the multidrop link while SMP Connect is communicating with the selected
device. If selected, acquisition of the remaining devices will be suspended. This setting
applies only to devices that support the feature.
• Suspend IED.
This device-specific setting indicates whether or not the master protocol component
should suspend data acquisition while SMP Connect is communicating with the device.
• IED Address.
This address identifies the device in a multidrop configuration. This setting is ignored if
the Suspend IED check box is not selected.
• Modem Signals.
This setting specifies whether or not the serial port associated with the IED supports

112 • Chapter 14: Using Passthrough Connections

 modem control signals. If selected, the DTR and RTS modem control signals will be
transferred across the passthrough connection. By default, modem control signals are
NOT transferred.
• Locked at Startup.
This setting is a security feature. If selected, the passthrough connection will not be
available when the SMP Gateway starts up. You can subsequently make it available by
enabling specific logical data points, as explained under “Locking Passthrough and
Incoming RAS Connections”, page 103.
• Inactivity Timeout.
This mandatory setting specifies how long the passthrough connection link established by
SMP Connect can remain inactive. If the program detects that no data exchange occurred
between the device and the application during the specified timeout period, it prompts the
user to either terminate the session or specify a longer wait time.
• Comments.
This optional setting is used to store the instructions that will be displayed to the
SMP Connect operator, such as telling him which communications program to use with
the device.

14.2.2 Installing a Loopback Cable, if Necessary

There are 3 types of loopback connections that you can set up between the device manufacturer’s
maintenance or configuration application and SMP Connect:
• Virtual serial.
This is the preferred choice.
• Real serial.
You set up this type of connection only if the device manufacturer’s application cannot use a
virtual communications port.
• TCP/IP.
You set up this type of connection only if the device manufacturer’s application uses TCP/IP.
TCP/IP and virtual serial loopbacks do not require any further physical modifications to the
configuration.

To set up a real serial loopback connection:

 Configure the device manufacturer’s application to use one of the PC serial ports, COM1 for
example.
 Attach a null modem cable to this serial port.

Note: A null modem cable is an RS-232 cable that crosses the sending wire with the
receiving wire.

 Instead of attaching the other end of the cable, to the device, attach it to a second serial port of
the same PC, for example COM2.

Note: Most modern PCs are equipped only with a single serial port. If virtual
communications ports are not supported by the application and the PC is only
equipped with a single serial port, a serial expansion card must be installed on
the PC.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 113

14.2.3 Setting Up a List of Applications and Loopback
Connections
SMP Connect communicates with the device manufacturer’s application via a loopback
connection. There may be several applications running on the PC. You have to identify all the
available applications, and for each application that must remotely access a substation device, you
have to provide the following information:
• Specify whether the application is to be started manually, identify the path to the application,
and provide any arguments required by the program.
• Specify what type of loopback connection is to be used between SMP Connect and the
application, and define the communications settings of the loopback connection. Loopback
connection types are described in section 14.2.2, above.

To start SMP Connect:

 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Connect.

The SMP Connect application window appears, showing a list of all the passthrough
connections you previously configured with SMP Config for this SMP Gateway.

The top portion of the screen shows the settings you entered in SMP Config, with one additional
piece of information: the Status column, which indicates whether a passthrough connection is
currently being used for a particular device. The bottom portion of the screen shows a trace of
passthrough connection events.

To access IED application and loopback settings:

 Select the device in the top pane of the SMP Connect window.
 From the Control menu, choose IED Application Settings.

114 • Chapter 14: Using Passthrough Connections

 To add an application to the list:
 In the IED Application Settings dialog box, click Add.
 In the dialog box that appears, type the application name and click OK.
 Select the newly created application in the list.
 Under Application Settings:
 Specify whether the application is to be started manually. If you select to start it
manually, then when you connect to the device, SMP Connect will start the passthrough
and loopback connections without starting the application; you will be able to start the
application manually.
 Type the complete path to the application executable file.
 Type the command line arguments required by the application, if any (see the
manufacturer’s documentation).
 Under Local Communication Settings:
 Specify whether SMP Connect is to use a virtual serial loopback, a real serial loopback,
or a TCP/IP loopback connection to communicate with the NVT. Most manufacturers’
tools use a serial (virtual or real) connection. However, if you are using a terminal
emulator program such as Microsoft HyperTerminal to communicate with the device, you
can use a TCP/IP loopback connection.
 Click Configure to specify the loopback connection settings:
 The application port (serial only).
 The communications settings, such as parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control (serial
only).
 The SMP Connect port (real serial only).
 The logical port number for the TCP/IP connection; type the same TCP/IP port
number that you set in the device manufacturer’s tool or in the HyperTerminal
program (TCP/IP only).

SMP Gateway User Manual • 115

  An indication whether your application uses the Telnet protocol, or not. Most
terminal applications using TCP/IP do use the Telnet protocol, so the check box is
selected by default (TCP/IP only).
 Under Remote Communication Settings:
 Specify whether you want the passthrough server to wait until the application first data
transmission before initializing the connection between the device and the SMP Gateway,
or initialize it as soon as the application is started.

Note: You can also use the Apply base settings for arrow-button to apply default
base settings for some type of applications.

Repeat the previous steps for all applications. Make sure you click OK to save the settings and
close the IED Application Settings dialog box.

14.3 Connecting to the Device

Once you have configured the passthrough server and the SMP Connect application, you are ready
to establish a passthrough connection to the device:
 In SMP Connect, select the device in the device list.
 From the Control menu, select Connect to IED.
 In the IED Application Selection dialog box, choose the application /NVT that will
communicate with the device.
 Click the Connect button.

If you requested that the application be started manually, the trace window will show that
SMP Connect has established the SMP Gateway passthrough connection and has started the
loopback connection with the application, but the application window will not open. Start the
application now.
You are now ready to use the application the same way you would if you were connected to it
locally.

14.4 Testing the Passthrough Connection

Setting up a passthrough connection is usually a straightforward operation. When problems occur,
it is often because a device cannot communicate and perform data acquisition simultaneously.
You may find the following guidelines useful in identifying and solving problems with
passthrough connections:
• Using SMP Config, check the Suspend IED setting for the selected passthrough connection.
If you modified the setting, remember to load the modified configuration and restart the
SMP Gateway.
• Using SMP Connect, check the message pane to see if the passthrough connection is being
activated correctly.
• Using SMP Trace, open the Master Protocols folder, and check whether the component is
receiving requests from the control center.
• Using SMP Trace, open the PassThruServer folder, and check whether any data is being
exchanged with the device.

116 • Chapter 14: Using Passthrough Connections

 • Using SMP Trace, open the Connections folder, and check whether any data is being
exchanged with the device.

14.5 Deactivating the Passthrough Connection

A passthrough connection is automatically deactivated when the manufacturer’s application or
terminal application is closed. It can also be deactivated manually.

To manually deactivate a passthrough connection:

 Click the device in the SMP Connect window.
 From the Control menu, choose Disconnect from IED.

The SMP Connect trace window now shows that the passthrough connection is no longer
active.

Note: The passthrough connection is automatically deactivated if there is no data

exchanged on the link during the inactivity timeout period specified in
SMP Config for this particular passthrough connection.

14.6 Using the Trace of Passthrough Connection

Events
The bottom portion of the SMP Connect application window is used to display passthrough
connection event messages. It is quite useful to identify and solve passthrough connection
problems. It can also be configured to display all the data that is exchanged during a given
passthrough session. The whole trace can be printed or saved to a text file.

To display all exchanged data in the trace pane:

 Before establishing a passthrough connection, choose Detail Trace from the View menu.

To print the current content of the trace pane:

 From the View menu, choose Print Preview, if you want to get a preview of the printed trace,
or Print if you want to print it directly.

To save the current content of the trace pane to a file:

 From the View menu, choose Save As.
 In the Save As dialog box, select the directory where you want to save the file and type the
file name.
 Click Save.

To clear the contents of the trace pane:

 From the View menu, choose Clear Trace.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 117

14.7 Changing How Time Information is Displayed
in SMP Connect
To change how time information is displayed:
 From the View menu, choose Time Display Options.
 From the Time Display Options dialog box, select the type of display from the Time Display
Format drop box: you can choose between the local time (using the time zone settings of the
PC) and UTC. Normally, the clock of the SMP Gateway is set in UTC, but you can display
the information using the time format you like.

118 • Chapter 14: Using Passthrough Connections

15 Recording Sequence of
Events

Sequence-of-events recorders (SERs) are widely used in the power industry. Some IEDs and
RTUs are dedicated SERs, while other devices implement the SER functionality as part of their
function set.
The SMP Gateway also provides an SER function, which allows the generation of events for IEDs
that do not support this feature.
This chapter describes how the SMP Gateway can generate events based on real-time acquisition
data, presents the format in which these events are available, and explains how to configure this
feature using SMP Config.

15.1 Events
The SMP Gateway SER generates events based on the real-time data it acquires from IEDs and
RTUs, notably through master protocols, when specific trigger conditions occur for selected data
points: these data points are called event data points.

15.1.1 Supported Data Point Types

Event data points can be of the following types:
• Binary inputs
• Analog outputs
• Binary outputs

15.1.2 Trigger Conditions

An event is generated when one of the following conditions occurs:
• The state (value) of an event binary input has changed.
• The quality of an event binary input has changed.
• A control operation was performed on an event analog output.
• A control operation was performed on an event binary output.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 119

15.1.3 Quality Flags
The quality flags used for events are slightly different than those used in RTDX for real-time data.
Actually, they are a subset of the RTDX quality flags:
• Only the Good (OK) and Forced event quality flags have the same meaning for events than
in RTDX.
• All other RTDX quality flags translate to the Suspect event quality flag.
For additional information about RTDX quality flags, see “Appendix B - RTDX Status Flags”,
page B-1.

15.2 Sequence-of-Events Log Entries

SMP Gateway events are made available to users through log entries. These entries are stored in
the Sequence of Events log, which can be viewed using SMP Log.
A new entry is added to the Sequence of Events log each time an event occurs.
The format of the entry depends on the type of the corresponding event data point, and can be
customized at configuration time, as described in the “Customizing the Format of the Different
Event Log Entries” section, page 121.

15.2.1 Additional Entries

Additional entries are added to the Sequence of Events log when:
• the SMP Gateway restarts;
• the SMP Gateway internal clock is adjusted, which results in a time change.

15.2.2 Syslog Entries

Entries stored in the Sequence of Events log can also be transmitted to a syslog receiver.

15.3 Configuring the SER

The SMP Gateway SER is a system component that is configured using SMP Config.
To set up the SER, you must:
• Activate the SER function.
• Customize the format of the event log entries for each point type.
• Select the event data points.
• Define point-specific labels to be used in log entries, if necessary.
• Change how time information is displayed in the event entries, if necessary.
Each of these configuration steps is explained in details in the following sections.

15.3.1 Activating the SER

The SMP Gateway SER function is not active by default.

120 • Chapter 15: Recording Sequence of Events

 To activate the SER:
 In SMP Manager, from the Tools menu, choose SMP Config to open it.
 In the left pane of SMP Config, under the SMP Gateway name branch, expand the System
branch.
 Select the Sequence of Events branch, and then select the General branch.

 Put a checkmark in the Enabled cell.

15.3.2 Customizing the Format of the Different Event Log Entries

Event entries are formatted according to their corresponding data point type. Default entries are
provided, using keywords that allow insertion of event- or point-specific information at runtime.
The following table lists the various keywords that are available:

Keyword Description

CONTROL The control operation that was performed, between the following:
(analog and binary
 Select
control events only)
 Execute
 Direct Execute

CONTROLRESULT The result of the control operation that was performed. If the operation failed, the
(analog and binary cause is also displayed.
control events only)

CONTROLTYPE The execution type of the control operation that was performed, between the
(binary control following:
events only)
 Open
 Close
 Pulse

CONTROLVALUE The analog control value.

(analog control
events only)

SMP Gateway User Manual • 121

 Keyword Description

LABEL This keyword can be used to insert context-sensitive text in the log entries.
For each selected event data points, you can define labels that will be inserted in
the log entries depending on the current value of an input point, or on the
execution type of the control operation performed on an output point:
 For binary events, two labels can be specified: one for state 0, and another for
state 1.
 For analog control operation events, a single label is used for all operations,
regardless of the value or execution type.
 For binary control operation events, three labels can be specified, one for
each execution type: Open, Close and Pulse.
For example, when a binary event occurs, the LABEL keyword is replaced by the
text of the State 0 Label or State 1 Label specified for the corresponding point, if
this keyword is present in the binary event pre-formatted entry.
To learn how to specify these labels, see “Defining Point-Specific Labels for Log
Entries”, page 124.

POINTDESC The description of the event data point that triggered the event.
This is the same description that is specified for the point in the corresponding
master protocol configuration.

POINTNAME The name of the event data point that triggered the event.
This is the complete RTDX name of the point, with its device prefix.

QUALITY The quality of the event data point that triggered the event.
(binary events only)
This is not the complete RTDX quality, but a simplified version of it, as
described in the “Quality Flags” section, page 120.

STATE The state (value) of the event data point that triggered the event.
(binary events only)

TIME The event timestamp, in the UTC format, which is the date and time at which the
event occurred.

TIMESOURCE The source of the event timestamp.

Depending on the IED and the protocol used to retrieve the real-time data, the
timestamp will be provided by the IED (Device) or the SMP Gateway internal
clock (RTC).

TIMEZONE The complete description of the time zone specified at configuration time, which
includes the time difference with GMT, in hours, and the main locations that are
found in this time zone.

Table 15-1 Sequence of events recorder entry format keywords

The default entries will fulfill most user requirements, but can be customized if necessary.

To customize the format of event entries:

 Under the Sequence of Events branch, select the Event Entries Format branch.

122 • Chapter 15: Recording Sequence of Events

  Specify the row of the type of event that must be customized (Event Binary Inputs, Event
Analog Outputs or Event Binary Outputs).
 In the Format cell, adjust the provided entry text as required, using plain text and the
aforementioned keywords.

Note: Each keyword must be surrounded by brackets (ex. [LABEL]). As a result,

brackets are not allowed in event entries except for that usage.

15.3.3 Selecting Event-Generating Data Points

Events are generated when the value or quality of the event binary input points change, or when
control operations are performed on the event analog and binary output points.
Like for slave protocols, data points are selected by typing the point names one by one, or by
selecting them using the Subscribe To or Select Points commands.

To select event data points by typing their name:

 Select the Event Binary Inputs, Event Analog Outputs or Event Binary Outputs branch.
 In the first empty row, click in the Point Name cell.

 Type the complete RTDX name of the point, including the device prefix.
 Repeat these steps for each event data point.

To select event data points using the Subscribe To command:

 Select the Sequence of Events branch.
 From the Tools menu, choose Subscribe To.
 In the Master I/O list, expand the branch of the component that produces the data points to
select.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 123

  Choose the data points. Use the CTRL and SHIFT keys on your keyboard to extend your
selection.
 Click the right arrow button.

The selected data points are added to the Slave I/O list, under the corresponding event point
branches. For example, selected binary input points will be added to the Event Binary Inputs
branch.
 Repeat these steps for each component that produces data points to select.

To select event data points using the Select Points command:

 Select the Event Binary Inputs, Event Analog Outputs or Event Binary Outputs branch.
 In the first empty row, click in the Point Name cell.
 From the Tools menu, choose Select Points.
 In the Select Points window, expand the branch of the component that produces the data
points to select.
 Click Paste.
 Repeat these steps for each event data point.
 Close the Select Points window.

15.3.4 Defining Point-Specific Labels for Log Entries

Labels are used to customize log entries with context-sensitive information.
For example, two labels can be specified for binary events: one for state 0, and another one for
state 1; if the LABEL keyword is found in the pre-formatted entry for binary event, it will be
replaced at runtime by the state 0 label when the corresponding binary input turns to 0, and by the
state 1 label when it turns to 1.
Labels are point-specific: they must be defined separately for each event data point.
For additional information about keywords and pre-formatted log entries, see “Customizing the
Format of the Different Event Log Entries”, page 121.

To define point-specific labels for log entries:

 Select the Event Binary Inputs, Event Analog Outputs or Event Binary Outputs branch.
 In the row of the event point to edit, click in the State 0 Label or State 1 Label cell (for event
binary inputs); in the Label cell (for event analog outputs); or in the Open Label, Close
Label or Pulse Label cell (for event binary outputs).
 Type the text that will replace the LABEL keyword in the pre-formatted entry, for this event
data point.

15.3.5 Changing How Time Information is Displayed in Log

Entries
Event timestamps are stored in the UTC format and are usually displayed using this format in the
sequence-of-events log entries. It is possible to change the timestamp display format to local time,
by specifying the time zone and daylight saving time settings that are specific to the user’s locale.

124 • Chapter 15: Recording Sequence of Events

 To display timestamps in the local time format in log entries:
 Select the General branch.
 In the Client Time Zone cell, select the time zone setting specific to your locale.
 To have the SMP Gateway perform daylight saving time adjustments when required, put a
checkmark in the Auto Adjust DST cell.

15.4 Activating Syslog Reporting of Events

The sequence-of-events log entries can also be transmitted to a syslog receiver.
To learn how to configure the SMP Gateway syslog transmitter, see “Setting up Syslog”,
page 161. Make sure the Sequence of Events log is enabled in the Facilities branch, and that is set
to the desired Facility code.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 125

16 Using the Annunciator
Interface

The SMP Gateway Annunciator option is a cost-effective solution that provides a local HMI for
substation operators. Using SMP Config, you can set up alarms based on the analog and binary
data points of your SMP Gateway, and design simple pages to display the current statuses and
values of these points and alarms on a touch screen, which also allows you to handle the alarms
and perform control operations.

Note: The Annunciator option is only available for the SMP 16/CP and SMP 16/SG.

With the Annunciator option, you can:

• monitor a list of all active alarms, as well as alarms that have returned to normal but have not
been acknowledged yet;
• acknowledge, block and clear alarms;
• consult an history log of recent alarms and operations on alarms;
• access some of the SMP Gateway internal statistics;
• monitor real-time values of the SMP Gateway data points through user-defined and highly
customizable readings pages;
• perform control operations on your SMP Gateway on site, just like you would from the
SCADA.
An example of the Annunciator display is presented on the next page. In this example, we see a
readings page that has been designed to display the simplified single-line diagram of a feeder.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 127

 The Annunciator display is divided in three parts:
• The alarm counters bar.
This bar is located at the top of the display, and shows in real-time the number of active and
blocked alarms.

• The display tabs.

The various display pages can be accessed via a tab-based navigation system. The following
tabs are available:
• Alarms.
Display the list of all alarms that are active, or that have returned to normal and that have
not been recalled yet. You can also use this tab to manage the alarms.

To customize this page, see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, page 132.
To learn how to manage alarms, see “Managing Alarms”, page 149.
• Readings.
Display user-defined pages that show real-time values of data points and allow control
operations on the SMP Gateway output points.

To create reading pages, see “Creating a User-Defined Readings Page”, page 138.
To learn how to control output points from a readings page, see “Performing Control
Operations from a Readings Page”, page 155.
• Blocked.
Display the list of blocked alarm inputs. The operator can block an alarm input to disable
the triggering of alarms for this given input, even when alarm conditions are met. Such
behavior may be required, when a certain part of the substation is under maintenance, for

128 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

 example.

To customize this page, see “Setting Up the Blocked Page”, page 135.
To learn how to block/unblock alarm inputs, see “Blocking Alarm Inputs”, page 150.
• History.
Display the contents of the history log file, which contains entries about recent alarm and
operator actions.

To customize this page, see “Setting Up the History Page”, page 136.
To learn how to use this page, see “Using the History Log”, page 151.
• System State.
Display various system information and statistics about the SMP Gateway and the
Annunciator.

To customize this page, see “Setting Up the System State Page”, page 137.
To learn how to use this page, see “Monitoring System State”, page 153.
• The single alarm display.
This part of the display is used to manage alarms one at a time. Depending on how it is
customized, the oldest or most recent alarm is displayed here, and the operator can
acknowledge or clear the alarm by pressing the display. The single alarm display can also be
hidden at configuration time.

In the following sections, we will describe how to set up the Annunciator using SMP Config,
calibrate and connect a touch screen to the SMP Gateway, and use the various functionalities of
the Annunciator.

16.1 Activating the Annunciator Option

The Annunciator option is available since version 4 of the SMP Gateway Software & Tools. To
use it on your SMP Gateway, its firmware and application must be up-to-date. The Annunciator
must also be part of your SMP Gateway license.
To learn how to update the firmware, see “Updating the SMP Gateway Firmware”, page 205.
To learn how to update the SMP Gateway application, see “Updating the SMP Gateway
Application”, page 206.
The following section walks you through the configuration of the Annunciator within
SMP Config.

16.2 Setting Up the Annunciator

The Annunciator configuration is stored in the SMP Gateway configuration file, which is edited
using SMP Config.

To enable the Annunciator in the configuration file:

 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Config. SMP Config opens, displaying the current
configuration of your SMP Gateway.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 129

  In SMP Config, from the tree view, select and expand the Annunciator branch.
 Select the General branch.
 Select the Enabled check box.

To configure the Annunciator, you must go through the following steps:

• Define alarm categories and configure alarm inputs.
• Set up display pages.
• Create user-defined readings pages, if you like.
• Select which pages will be available for display, and which one will be displayed at startup.

You can also:

• change how time information is displayed in the various pages;
• set up an alarm buzzer to warn the operator of alarm occurrences.
The following sections explain all these steps in details.

16.2.1 Defining Alarm Categories

Alarm category is a concept that allows users to change the indicators used to tell the current state
of a given alarm in the Annunciator. The Default category provides the following indicators:
• A.
This is the default indicator for the appearance of an alarm, which is when the alarm condition
is met for the first time.
• R.
This is the default indicator for an alarm that returns to its normal state before it can be
acknowledged.
• Ax.
This is the default indicator for multiple appearances of an alarm, which is when the alarm
condition is met again following its return to normal state, before being acknowledged.
• Rx.
This is the default indicator for multiple appearance and return-to-normal occurrences that
ended with the alarm having returned to its normal state, all before being acknowledged.
By defining additional categories, you can provide different indicators for these specific alarm
states, which can be specified on a per-alarm-input basis.

To define an alarm category:

 In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Alarms branch and then select the Categories
branch.
 In the first empty row, click in the Name cell.
 Type a name for the new category.
 In the Appearance Symbol cell, type the character(s) to display instead of the A indicator for
alarms of this category.
 In the Multiple Appearance Symbol cell, type the character(s) to display instead of the Ax
indicator for alarms of this category.
 In the Return-to-Normal Symbol cell, type the character(s) to display instead of the R
indicator for alarms of this category.

130 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

  In the Multiple Return-to-Normal Symbol cell, type the character(s) to display instead of
the Rx indicator for alarms of this category.
 (Optional) In the Description cell, type a short description that explains the role and purpose
of this category. This information is only specified for configuration purposes, as it will not be
displayed in the Annunciator.
Alarm categories are assigned to alarms while configuring alarm inputs.

16.2.2 Configuring Alarm Inputs

Alarms are the core of the Annunciator. You can use the Annunciator to display real-time values
or to perform control operations, but its most distinctive feature is the display and handling of
alarms.
Before configuring the various pages, you must configure the conditions that will trigger alarms,
which are called the alarm inputs. The Annunciator supports alarm inputs from analog inputs and
binary inputs. For analog inputs, alarms can be triggered when their value goes beyond a given
threshold. For binary inputs, alarms can be triggered when their state changes.

To define alarm conditions for an analog input:

 In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Alarms branch to reveal the Analog Inputs
branch.
 Select the Analog Inputs branch.
 In the right pane grid, in the Name cell, type the name of an analog input for which you want
to define the alarm conditions.

Note: The same subscription feature that was available to configure slave protocols can
be used instead of typing names. This is explained a bit further in this section.

 In the Alarm Level cell, select a severity level for this input alarms.
 In the Low Threshold cell, specify the value under which an alarm will be triggered for this
input. For example, if you specify a low threshold value of -13.1, an alarm will be triggered if
the input value becomes smaller than -13.1.
 In the High Threshold cell, specify the value over which an alarm will be triggered for this
input. For example, if you specify a high threshold value of 125.7, an alarm will be triggered
if the input value becomes larger than 125.7.
 In the Deadband cell, specify how much the value must go beyond the low or high threshold
to trigger an alarm. For example, if you set the deadband to a value of 5.0 and the high
threshold to a value of 125.5, an alarm will be triggered if the input value becomes larger than
130.5.

Note: This Deadband setting is different from the one found in the configuration of
master protocols, used to determine whether a value should be reported, or not,
to slave protocols through RTDX.

 If you want to temporarily disable the triggering of alarms for this data point, select the
Disabled check box. The alarm conditions will be preserved in your configuration file, but
will not be used by the Annunciator.
 In the Low Threshold Description cell, you can type a description for low threshold alarms
on this analog input. This description will be displayed in the various Annunciator pages
when such an alarm condition is met, or when an operation (ex. acknowledge) is performed

SMP Gateway User Manual • 131

 on such an alarm. The High Threshold Description setting works similarly, for high
threshold alarms on this input.
 In the Category cell, select the category of indicators to use to display the alarm state. To use
the default indicators (A, Ax, R and Rx), select Default.

To define alarm conditions for a binary input:

 In the right pane grid, in the Name cell, type the name of an analog input for which you want
to define the alarm conditions, or use the subscription feature as described above for analog
inputs.
 In the Alarm Level cell, select a severity level for this input alarms.
 In the Appearance Filter cell, specify how long, in milliseconds, the binary input must keep
the active state (TRUE or 1) before triggering an alarm. This setting filters “false” alarms.
 In the Disappearance Filter cell, specify how long, in milliseconds, the binary input must
keep the inactive state (FALSE or 0) before considering that the alarm is no longer active.
This setting filters “false” returns to normal.
 If you wish to trigger the alarm upon a 0 instead of a 1, select the Inverted check box.
 If you want to temporarily disable alarm conditions for this data point, select the Disabled
check box.
 In the Category cell, select the category of indicators to use to display the alarm state. To use
the default indicators (A, Ax, R and Rx), select Default.
 In the Description cell, you can type a description for alarms on this binary input. This
description will be displayed in the various Annunciator pages when such an alarm condition
is met, or when an operation (ex. acknowledge) is performed on such an alarm.

Typing each point name can be a tedious task, especially if you have a lot of alarm inputs to
define. Instead, you can use the same subscription mechanism you used to configure your slave
protocols.

To subscribe the Annunciator to master data points:

 Select the Analog Inputs branch.
 From the Tools menu, choose Subscribe To.

The Subscribe to Master I/O window appears. You can then select the master points for
which you want to define alarm conditions. To learn how to use this window, see
“Subscribing to the Master Data Points”, page 62. Once you click OK, the window closes and
a row is created in the Analog Inputs pane for each data points.
All that is left is to specify the conditions and descriptions for these alarm inputs.

16.2.3 Setting Up the Alarms Page

Once alarm conditions are defined, you may set up the various display pages, starting with the
Alarms page.
The Alarms page is essentially where all alarms are displayed in a list, and handled by the
operator of the Annunciator using touch buttons. To learn how to manage alarms, see “Managing
Alarms”, page 149.

132 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

 To configure the display settings of the Alarms page:
 In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Pages branch and select the Alarms branch.

The resulting content of the right pane is presented in the next screenshot.

Anytime during the configuration process, you can preview, at the bottom of the pane, how the
alarm list will look like on the Annunciator display.
The preview pane also allows the customization of the alarm list display.

To change the width of a column:

 Pass the mouse over the line that separates two column headers. The mouse cursor will
change to this:

 Click and drag the mouse to enlarge of reduce the width of the column on the left of the
cursor.
 If you want a given column to take all the width space that is actually unused, click the
column header itself.

To change the column order:

 Drag and drop each column where you want it to appear on the display.
 You can also to this using the Move Up and Move Down buttons appearing under Columns
at the top of the edition pane.

To make a column available/unavailable to the operator:

 Right-click any column header in the preview display.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 133

  A checkmark indicates that the column will be available, and it should be displayed as is in
the preview pane.
 Select any column name to change its availability state.

The rest of the customization process is performed in the other sections at the top of the edition
pane:
 Under Alarm list order, select which alarms should be displayed at the top of the list:
 The Oldest alarm at top setting is recommended if you want to deal with each alarm in
order and work them down to the most recent.
 If you want to deal with alarms as they occur, select Most recent alarm at top.
 If you want the Single alarm display to appear at the bottom of the Annunciator display, put a
checkmark in the Display the single alarm area check box, and then under Single alarm
display, select which alarm should be displayed in this area:
 To see the oldest unacknowledged alarm, select Show oldest unacknowledged alarm.
 To see the most recent unacknowledged alarm, select Show most recent
unacknowledged alarm.

Note: To learn how to use the single alarm display, see “Using the Single Alarm
Display”, page 151.

 Under Alarm acknowledgement, select how alarms will be acknowledged by the operator:
 To be free to acknowledge and recall any alarm in any given order, select Alarms can be
acknowledged and recalled in any order.
 To force the operator to acknowledge and recall alarms in the order they occur, select
Alarms must be acknowledged and recalled in the order they occurred.
 To automatically acknowledge and recall alarms as they occur, without the intervention
of the operator, select Alarms automatically acknowledge and recall.
 Under Columns, select which columns should be displayed in the alarms list. Remember that
you can see the result of your selection under Preview.
 Still under Columns, you can move the column names up and down using the Move Up and
Move Down buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting with the
topmost column name in the list.
 Under Alarm state colors, set the colors for alarm messages that appear in the Annunciator
various display pages:
 Set the text and fill colors for active unacknowledged alarm messages. Different colors
may be specified for major and minor alarms.
 Do the same for active acknowledged alarms, unacknowledged alarms that have returned
to normal and acknowledged alarms that have returned to alarms.

134 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

  To revert to default colors, click Default Colors.
 The leftmost button of the Alarms page will be used to acknowledge the appearance of new
alarms. Not to be confused with the acknowledge button itself, it is as the first step undertaken
by an operator to notify the system that he knows that this alarm was triggered. The name of
this button can be changed, as follows:
 Beside Acknowledge new alarms label, type the new name of the button.

For example, if the SMP Gateway is equipped with a sound buzzer, you might want to
name it Clear Sound.

You can see the name of the button changing in the preview section of the edition pane.
 You can also use the preview section of the edition pane to modify the columns’ width, order
and availability state, like for the Alarms page (see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, page 132).

16.2.4 Setting Up the Blocked Page

An operator may want to “deactivate” some alarms at runtime, during maintenance periods for
example. The Annunciator make it possible by allowing some data points to be blocked, which
means that even when alarm conditions are met for these points, they will no longer appear in the
Alarms page: the blocked alarms are then transferred to the Blocked page.
To learn how to block and unblock alarm inputs, see “Blocking Alarm Inputs”, page 150.

To configure the display settings of the Blocked page:

 In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Pages branch and select the Blocked Alarms
branch. The resulting content of the right pane is presented in the following screenshot.

 Under Columns, select which columns should be displayed in the blocked alarms list. You
can see the result of your selection under Preview.
 Still under Columns, you can move the column names up and down using the Move Up and
Move Down buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting with the
topmost column name in the list.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 135

  You can also use the preview section of the edition pane to modify the columns’ width, order
and availability state, like for the Alarms page (see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, page 132).

16.2.5 Setting Up the History Page

Alarms messages are preserved in a log file, which content is displayed in the History page.
To learn how to use this page, see “Using the History Log”, page 151.

To configure the display settings of the History page:

 In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Pages branch and select the History branch.

The resulting content of the right pane is presented in the following screenshot.

 Under Columns, select which columns should be displayed in the messages list. You can see
the result of your selection under Preview.
 Still under Columns, you can move the column names up and down using the Move Up and
Move Down buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting with the first
column name in the list.
 You can also use the preview section of the edition pane to modify the columns’ width, order
and availability state, like for the Alarms page (see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, page 132).
 The messages list can be filtered by the operator at runtime to display only alarm or operation
messages, using touch buttons. To display these buttons in the History page, select the Show
display types buttons check box.
 Finally, you can add a Clear History button to this page, by putting a checkmark in the Show
clear button check box. This button allows you clear the history log of all its contents.
The messages list can hold a limited number of messages, which is called the history length.

To adjust the history length:

 In the tree view, under the Annunciator branch, select the General branch.

136 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

  In the History Length cell, specify the maximum number of alarm messages that will be
preserved in the history log.

16.2.6 Setting Up the System State Page

Various system information and statistics about the SMP Gateway and the Annunciator can be
displayed in the System State page.

To learn how to use this page, see “Monitoring System State”, page 153.

To select which information should be displayed and how:

 In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Pages branch and select the System State
branch. The resulting content of the right pane is presented in the following screenshot.

 Under Analog Points Columns, select which columns should be displayed in analog
inputs/outputs lists. You can see the result of your selection under Analog Points Preview.
 Still under Analog Points Columns, you can move the column names up and down using the
Move Up and Move Down buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting
with the first column name in the list.
 Under Binary Points Columns, select which columns should be displayed in binary
inputs/outputs lists. You can see the result of your selection under Binary Points Preview.
 Still under Binary Points Columns, you can move the column names up and down using the
Move Up and Move Down buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting
with the first column name in the list.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 137

  You can also use both preview sections of the edition pane to modify the columns’ width,
order and availability state, like for the Alarms page (see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”,
page 132).
 Under Statistics, select the statistics pages you want to display, by marking the corresponding
check boxes. Clear the check boxes for the categories you want to hide. If you do not want to
display any statistics, clear the Show Statistics check box. The following statistics pages are
available in the Annunciator:
• Vital System Information.
Contains the same information that is displayed in the page of the same name in
SMP Stats. Information available includes hardware/software information, temperature
information and power statuses.
• Performance (General).
Contains real-time information about the SMP Gateway CPU load and memory usage.
• Performance (Threads).
Contains real-time information about the SMP Gateway CPU load specific to each
execution thread.
• Real Time Data Exchange.
Contains statistics about real-time data that is exchanged between the masters, the slaves
and other software components of the SMP Gateway.
• SysServer.
Contains various real-time statistics that are maintained by the SMP Gateway system
server.
• Master/slaves Scan Process.
Contains the scan process statistics of every master and slave.

Note: Data point information is always displayed in the System State page.

16.2.7 Creating a User-Defined Readings Page

Readings pages are used to display real-time values of some of the SMP Gateway data points, and
to perform control operations on its output points. With some work, a simplified diagram of your
substation can be made using up to 15 readings pages.
Like other display pages, readings pages are configured using SMP Config:
 From the tree view, expand the Pages branch and select the Readings branch.

The Readings Annunciator Page pane appears on the right.

138 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

 The readings page list is found on the left. The right part of the pane is occupied by a grid of 18
rows by 9 columns. Each cell is representing a small part of a readings page, and can be used to
display static text, or the current state or value of one of your SMP Gateway input points. A “click
action” can also be configured for the cell. Supported actions include switching the focus to
another readings page and controlling one of the SMP Gateway output points. Above the grid,
there is a toolbar giving access to all the design functions.

To create and populate a readings page:

 Under Page List, click Add. A new page called Page 1 was added to the list. Type a
significant name for the page, or leave the default name, and press Enter.

Note: You can create a clone of an existing page, by clicking Duplicate. Also, if you
want to change the name of the page later, just select the page from the list and
click Rename.

 Cell(s) selection can be performed in many ways:

 To select a single cell, click it.
 To select all cells from a given row, click the row header.
 To select all cells from a given column, click the column header.
 To select multiple cells from different adjacent rows and column, click and drag over the
cells you want to select.
 Finally, to select all cells, click the non-editable cell found at the intersection of the row
and column headers.

 Select the cell at the intersection of row 1 and column A: let us call it cell 1A. When you click
the cell, the grid toolbar becomes active.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 139

 The toolbar various controls are presented in the following table:

Control(s) Description

Allow you to cut, copy and paste cells in the currently edited page
or from this page to another one.

Allow you to undo last edits, one at a time. If you want to revert to
an edit you just undo, you can use the redo button. Note that a list
of edits is preserved for each page, so you can switch back to a
page you left a few minutes ago and undo the last change you did
to this page, for example.

Change the font and font size of cell text. Only a limited number
of font and sizes are available on the SMP Gateway.

Apply the Bold or Italic font style to cell text. You can also apply
both styles at the same time.

Change the text alignment. Available choices are: left aligned,

centered and right aligned. Text is left aligned by default.

Change the cell font and background colors for normal text. Click
the appropriate button to apply the currently selected color (as
displayed on the button itself) or click the drop-down button to
select the color you like.
Other color options are only accessible through the Cell
Properties dialog box, which is presented later in this section.

Clear the entire content of a cell.

Open the Cell Properties dialog box. Depending on the shortcut

button clicked, either the General, Font or Click tab will be
selected. The Cell Properties dialog box is presented later in this
section.

Enter preview mode. This functionality is described more in

details later in this section.

Table 16-1 Annunciator readings page editing toolbar controls, in SMP Config

Note: If you click on any button while multiple cells are selected, the resulting
modifications will be applied to all cells, if possible.

 Still in cell 1A, click the General Properties button ( ).

Note: You can also open the Cell Properties dialog box by double-clicking a cell.

140 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

 The General tab is used to select the type of content that will be displayed in the cell: static text or
the current reading of an input point (analog or binary). Text and background colors can also be
set here. The resulting display is previewed at the bottom of the tab.
 By default, every cell is configured to display static text. For the sake of our example, we will
display the minute field of the SMP Gateway internal clock, which value is available in
analog input _smp___clockMinute. Static text cell can also be used to display a colored
cell with no text at all.

Note: You can also type the text directly in the cell, from the Readings Annunciator
Page pane.

 If you like, change the text and background colors.

 Click the Font tab to edit the text font, style, alignment and size. A preview is also available
in this tab.
 Click OK to complete edition of cell 1A.

To display the real-time value of an analog input:

 Select cell 2A and click the General Properties button.
 In the Select cell content box, select Display analog data point.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 141

  In the Data Point box, select the desired data point. For our example, select
_smp___clockMinute. You can also type the point name if you prefer.
 Select the number of decimals you want to display after the point for the value displayed. You
can also apply a scale factor to the value before displaying it.
 If you like, change the text and background colors.
 If the data point is configured as an alarm input, you can specify different text and
background colors to use while the input is in alarm. You can also make the cell blinks (it
toggles between the normal and alarm – or state 0 and state 1 – colors) by selecting the Flash
check box.
 Similarly, you can specify different colors to use when the data point quality is bad (ex.
communications failure).
 You can also use the Font tab to edit the text font, style, alignment and size. Note that the
same font, style, alignment and size will be used when the data point is in alarm or when its
quality is bad.
 Click OK to apply changes.

To display the real-time state of a binary input point in a cell:

 Select the cell that will display a binary input real-time state and click the General Properties
button.
 In the Select cell content box, select Display binary data point.
 In the Data Point box, select the desired data point. You can also type the point name if you
prefer.

The bottom part of the General tab is a bit different than for analog data points:

 Type the text to display when the input state is 0. For example, if the point represents the state
of a relay, you can type open. If you want the cell to blink in this state, select the Flash
check box.
 Type the text to display when the input state is 1. For example, if the point represents the state
of a relay, you can type close. If you want the cell to blink in this state, select the Flash
check box.
 You can specify the text and background colors to use while the point is in either state, or
when the point quality is bad.

142 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

  You can also use the Font tab to edit the text font, style, alignment and size. Note that the
same font, style, alignment and size will be used when the data point is in alarm or when its
quality is bad.
 Click OK to apply changes.
Using the preview mode, you can transform the grid into a preview of the Annunciator display for
this readings page. When you enter this mode, all cells configured for real-time display are
replaced by simulated values.

To enter the preview mode:

 From the grid’s toolbar, choose Preview Mode. Value cells display zero values and the Data
Point Simulator window appears.

Note: The Data Point Simulator window will remain open as long as you stay in the
Readings branch of SMP Config tree view.

 Using the Data Point Simulator, edit the current value of the points that are used in the current
page. You should see the corresponding cells changing in the preview pane.
 Still using the Data Point Simulator, you can also simulate bad quality for any point in the list,
by selecting Error under Quality.
 To exit preview mode, click Preview Mode, or select any other branch in SMP Config tree
view.
Finally, you can also attach an “On Click” handler function to a cell. A handler function is an
operation that is performed when a cell is pressed on screen, just like it would be clicked using a
mouse pointer. For example, you might like to add, to your readings pages, buttons that allow you
to control specific binary outputs or to open another readings page. By default, a cell has no
handler attached to it.

To add a Change page handler function to a cell:

 Select the cell.
 Double-click it, and then click the Click tab or click the On Click Properties button on the
grid toolbar.
 In the Select action to perform when user clicks cell box, select Change page.

 In the Page box, select which readings page should be displayed when the operator will press
the cell. All configured pages should be available for selection, plus the following options:

SMP Gateway User Manual • 143

 • <First>.
Display the first page of the readings pages list.
• <Previous>.
Display the page that appears just above in the readings pages list.
• <Next>.
Display the page that appears just below in the readings pages list.
• <Last>.
Display the last page of the readings pages list.
 When you have made your selection, click OK.
Binary output control requires a bit more configuration work, because you must set up a separate
window that will appear when you press the cell. This window contains customizable buttons that
allow you to set the output to state 0 and 1, and a Cancel button.

To add a Control Binary Output handler function to a cell:

 Select the cell.
 Double-click it, and then click the Click tab or click the On Click Properties button on the
grid toolbar.
 In the Select action to perform when user clicks cell box, select Control Binary Output.

 In the Data Point box, select the output point you want to control. You can type the name of
the point directly, if you prefer.
 In the Window Title box, type a title for the window that will appear when the cell will be
pressed.
 In the State 0 box, customize the button that will set the output point to the state of 0:
 Type the button name in the Label edit box.
 Specify the text and background colors for the button.
 A preview of the button is displayed at the bottom.
 Repeat the previous steps, this time in the State 1 box, for the button that will set the output
point to the state of 1.
 Click Preview, to have an idea of what it will look like on screen.
 Once you are finished, click OK.

144 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

 Note: To have a larger control operation button, you can select multiple cells and add to
these cells the same handler function and background color. Enter text for the
center cell and you end up with a button that is more visible and easier to use.

16.2.8 Selecting the Pages to Display

By default, all pages will be available for display. For some reasons, you might want some pages
to be unavailable to the operators.

To select the pages to display:

 In SMP Config tree view, under the Annunciator branch, select the Pages branch. The list of
all pages appears in the right pane.

 Select the corresponding check boxes for the pages you want to be available for display.
 Clear the corresponding check boxes for the pages you want to be unavailable for display.

16.2.9 Selecting the Page Displayed at Startup

You can select which page you want the Annunciator to display at startup.

To select the startup page:

 In SMP Config tree view, under the Annunciator branch, select the General branch.
 In the Initial Page cell, select the page you want to display at startup.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 145

16.2.10 Changing How Time Information is Displayed
Unless it is configured otherwise, time information is stored in the UTC format on the
SMP Gateway. However, UTC is not very convenient for display and operation purposes.
Moreover, date information is not formatted the same way in all countries.

To change the date and time display format:

 In SMP Config tree view, under the Annunciator branch, select the General branch.
 In the Time Zone cell, select the time zone where the SMP Gateway is located.
 If you want the time to be automatically adjusted for daylight savings, select the Auto Adjust
DST check box.
 In the Date Format cell, select the format to use to display date information. By default, year
is displayed first (all four digits), followed by the month and day, all separated by dashes
(ex. 2008-07-03).

16.2.11 Setting Up an Alarm Buzzer

The SMP Gateway has a normally open relay that can be used to trigger an output. If you install a
buzzer on this relay output, you can configure the Annunciator to trigger the buzzer upon alarm.

Note: To locate the relay output on the SMP Gateway back panel, refer to the
SMP 16 Installation Guide, S1120-13-1.

To activate the alarm buzzer feature:

 In SMP Config, from the tree view, select the General branch under the Annunciator branch.
 Select the Close Relay Contact on Alarm check box.

16.2.12 Temporarily Deactivating the Annunciator

For some reasons, you might want to deactivate the Annunciator, without losing its configuration.

To temporarily deactivate the Annunciator:

 In SMP Config, from the tree view, select the General branch under the Annunciator branch.
 Clear the Enabled check box under.

To reactivate the Annunciator:

 Select the Enabled check box.

16.3 Setting Up the Touch Screen for the

Annunciator
Now that you have completed the Annunciator setup, you are ready to connect and calibrate the
touch screen.
To learn how to set up a touch screen for your specific SMP Gateway platform, refer to the
corresponding SMP Gateway installation guide (ex. SMP 16 Installation Guide).

146 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

16.3.1 Specific SMP Gateway Requirements for the Touchscreen
Cooper Power Systems recommends the use of a touch screen from Elo TouchSystems with the
SMP Gateways.
The selected touch screen must support Elo TouchSystems drivers for Windows CE 4.2 or later,
and can implement any touchscreen technology except APR and Projected Capacitive.

16.3.2 Setting Up a Screen Saver using SMP Config

Your touch screen may have an energy saving feature, but you can also configure the Annunciator
to enter a screen saver mode during periods of inactivity.

To set up the Annunciator screen saver:

 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Config.
 In SMP Config, from the tree view, select the Annunciator branch, and then the General
branch.
 In the Screen Saver Wait Time cell, select the inactivity time to wait before the Annunciator
enters screen saver mode.
 You can also turn off this feature by selecting No Screen Saver.

16.4 Uploading the Configuration to the

SMP Gateway
Before you can use the Annunciator, two steps are left. You must:
• upload the configuration file to the SMP Gateway and restart the system;
• calibrate the touch screen at runtime.
For a little reminder on how to upload the configuration file to the SMP Gateway, see “Sending
the Configuration to the SMP Gateway”, page 39. Once the configuration file has been uploaded,
restart the SMP Gateway.
At the beginning of the SMP Gateway startup sequence, you should see some configuration
information displayed on the touch screen, and then the screen should become totally black. It will
remain black during the rest of the startup sequence, which may take a few minutes.
The calibration screen eventually appears. Calibration is the topic of the next section.

16.5 Calibrating the Touch Screen

The Annunciator enter calibration mode at startup. You can also calibrate the touch screen
anytime by pressing the Calibrate button found at the bottom right of the Annunciator display.
When the Annunciator enters calibration mode, a cross appear in the upper left corner of the
screen display. A message prompts you to touch the screen from a position of normal use. This
means that you should be in your normal working position; either sitting down or in front of the
rack standing up, as you intend to use it most of the times.
 Touch the upper-left cross. Repeat for each cross, as they appear on-screen.
 When this is over, a message will appear, asking if the cursor follows your finger. Leave your
finger on the screen and move it all over the display.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 147

  If these new calibration settings are correct, press yes to accept them.
 If you want to keep the old settings, press no.
 In both cases, you will be taken back to the Annunciator display. You can recalibrate the
screen anytime by pressing Calibrate.

Note: If, for some reasons, you are no longer able to access the calibration screen and
you do not want to restart the SMP Gateway, you can call back the calibration
screen via a console command, as described in the “Elo Touchscreen Driver
Manager” section, page 220.

16.6 Using the SMP Gateway Annunciator

The following sections explain the various functions of the Annunciator.

16.6.1 Navigating Through the Different Pages

To display a given page, press the name of the page tab.
To select an item from any displayed list, just press the row that contains it. If your fingertips are
too large or if you do not feel at ease with this method, you can use the large arrow key buttons
available at the bottom of each tab.
In all tabs, except readings, up and down arrow key buttons are available to move through each
item of the displayed list:

• In the Alarms, Blocked and History tabs, it allows you to move the selection highlight over
the previous or next alarm message.
• In the System State tab, there are two sets of up and down arrow key buttons: one under the
selection pane on the left, and another under the display pane on the right. Use the left set to
select an information page to display in the right pane, and the right one to scroll through the
displayed page.
Blocked, History and System State tab also have home and end buttons that allow you to jump
the selection highlight to the first or last item of the list. These buttons are represented by up and
down double-arrows.

The Readings tab has a slightly different navigation scheme.

The index of the currently displayed readings page is displayed on the left, with the total number
of pages available. On the right, two large arrow key buttons allow you to navigate through the
different pages. If your configuration contains a lot of readings pages, we suggest you add Change
page buttons to each page, to customize the navigation for your needs (see “Creating a User-
Defined Readings Page”, page 138).

148 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

16.6.2 Managing Alarms
If you previously defined alarm conditions, you will have to manage the alarms that will be
triggered when these conditions will be met.
When an alarm condition is met for a given alarm input, this condition is detected by the
Annunciator, which:
• turns on the sound warning system, to alert the operator that something requires its attention;
• adds the data point to the Alarms page, as an alarm message that uses the text and
background colors configured for the severity level of the condition (major or minor). The
alarm message will be preceded by the alarm appearance indicator displayed on a red
background. The ‘A’ letter is used as the indicator if no specific category was defined and
assigned to the corresponding alarm input.

You must turn off the sound warning system before you can acknowledge the alarm. The sound
warning system also acts as an interlock, ensuring that you are aware of all the alarms that occur.
To really hear a sound, you need to install a buzzer on the SMP Gateway as described in the
“Setting Up an Alarm Buzzer” section, page 146.

To turn off the sound warning system:

 From the Alarms page, press the leftmost button, which is named Ack New Alarms by
default. You can change the name of this button using SMP Config (see “Setting Up the
Alarms Page”, page 132).

To handle the alarm condition:

 Press General Ack/Clear to acknowledge all new alarms. It also clears the Alarms display of
all data points that have returned to their normal condition.

OR

Press Acknowledge to acknowledge the alarm. The entire row turns to a paler shade of its
original color. If more than one alarm is active, the alarm that will be acknowledged depends
on the alarm acknowledgement rule selected in SMP Config for the Alarms page (see
“Setting Up the Alarms Page”, page 132). If you selected Alarms can be acknowledged and
recalled in any order, you must select the alarm to acknowledge before pressing the button.

OR

Press Block to move the data point in alarm to the Blocked page. Make sure the data point
you want to block is selected before pressing the button. For more details about the block
feature, see “Blocking Alarm Inputs”, page 150.
The data points that are in an alarm condition remain in the alarm display until the points return to
their normal condition, at which time you can clear them from the display.
When a point returns to its normal condition, the sound warning system turns on again and the
alarm appearance indicator is replaced by the return-to-normal indicator displayed on a green
background. The ‘R’ letter is used as the indicator if no specific category was defined and
assigned to the corresponding alarm input.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 149

 You must once again clear the sound before you can acknowledge and recall the data point, which
will then no longer be displayed in the Alarms page.

To handle the return-to-normal condition:

 Click Clear Sound to clear the sound warning system.
 Handle the return-to-normal event. This can be performed in two different ways:
 Click General Ack./Clear to acknowledge all alarms and clear the alarm display of all
data points that have returned to their normal condition.

OR
 Press Acknowledge to acknowledge the alarm. Again, if more than one alarm can be
acknowledged, the alarm that will be acknowledged depends on the alarm
acknowledgement rule selected in SMP Config for the Alarms page. If you selected
Alarms can be acknowledged and recalled in any order, you must select the alarm to
acknowledge before pressing the button.

Then, press Clear in order to clear the alarm display of the data point that has returned to
normal. The alarm acknowledgement rule defined in SMP Config also applies to clear
(recall) operations.
If an alarm is triggered more than once for a given alarm input before it can be handled, the
indicator is replaced by the corresponding one defined for multiple occurrences, which is ‘Ax’ or
‘Rx’ if no specific category was defined and assigned to the corresponding alarm input.

16.6.3 Blocking Alarm Inputs

For some reasons, you might want to temporarily deactivate some alarm conditions. Such behavior
may be required, when a certain part of the substation is under maintenance, for example. For this
matter, the Annunciator offers an alarm input blocking feature. When an alarm input is blocked, it
no longer triggers alarms, even when alarm conditions are met.
You can only block an alarm input that is currently displayed in the Alarms page. When it is
blocked, the alarm input is moved to the Blocked page, and it will not appear in the Alarms page
until it is reactivated. In fact, alarms will no longer be triggered for this input.

To block an alarm input:

 From the Alarms page, select the data point that you want to block.
 Press Block.
 Select the Blocked page. The blocked alarm input should be displayed here.

150 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

 To reactivate a blocked alarm input:
 From the Blocked page, select the data point that you want to reactivate.
 Press Reactivate. The alarm input is moved back to the Alarms page. The sound warning
system turns on and you will then have to take action, to acknowledge and recall the input
current condition (see “Managing Alarms”, page 149).

To reactivate all blocked alarm inputs simultaneously:

 From the Blocked page, press Reactivate All.

16.6.4 Using the Single Alarm Display

The single alarm display is found at the bottom of the Annunciator display.

It is used to manage alarms one at a time. Depending on how it is customized, the oldest or most
recent alarm is displayed here, and the operator can acknowledge or clear the alarm by pressing
the display.
To customize the single alarm display, see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, page 132.
Using the single alarm display is easy:
• If the sound warning system is on, press the single alarm display, which will give the same
result than pressing Clear Sound in the Alarms page: the sound warning system is turned off
and the alarm is ready to be acknowledged.
• If the sound warning system has already been turned off, press the single alarm display to
acknowledge the alarm just like you would do using the Alarms page Acknowledge button.

16.6.5 Using the History Log

A history log file is stored in the gateway non-volatile memory to keep track of the most recent
alarms that were triggered, and of the operations that were executed to handle them. The log file is
circular and has a limited size: when it is full, new entries replace the oldest ones. The history log
file entries are displayed in the History page, in chronological order, starting with the oldest one at
the top.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 151

 This page resembles the Alarms page, with an additional column that indicates the type of entry.
Two types of entry are displayed in the History page:
• Alarms.
Every time an alarm appears or returns to normal, an entry is added to the log file. The
message displayed is the same that appears in the Alarms page, with the corresponding alarm
state indicator.
• Operator actions (an ‘O’ is displayed in the T column).
Whether the operator clears sound, acknowledges or recalls alarms, blocks or unblocks alarm
inputs, or performs control operations, an entry is added to the log file. The action executed is
described in the Description column.
To customize the History display page and to set the size of the history log file, see “Setting Up
the History Page”, page 136.
As stated previously, large arrow key buttons are available to scroll through the list of entries, and
when you select an entry, all related entries are highlighted. Two filtering buttons are also
available.

These buttons are kept “pressed” by default, which means that no filter is apply to the log display.

To filter alarm entries:

 Touch the Alarms (A) button. The button will appear “unpressed”, and only operator action
entries should be displayed.

152 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

 To display alarm entries:
 Touch the Alarms (A) button again. The button will appear “pressed” and the alarms entries
should be displayed.

To display only operator action entries:

 Touch the Operator (O) button. The button will appear “unpressed”, and only alarm entries
should be displayed.

To display operator action entries:

 Touch the Operator (O) button again. The button will appear “pressed” and operator action
entries should be displayed.

To clear the history log:

 Touch the Clear History button. This button is only visible if configured accordingly using
SMP Config (see “Setting Up the History Page”, page 136).

16.6.6 Monitoring System State

The System State page provides access to the SMP Gateway internal statistics and the current
value of all its data points.

The left pane lists all information or statistics pages that can be displayed in the right pane.
Under the Data Points branch, some branch names might be displayed in orange. This means that
the value of some data points displayed in these branches is unavailable due to communications
failure. These points are also displayed in orange in the right pane.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 153

 When an analog inputs or analog outputs branch is selected, the right pane displays the following
information for each analog input:

• Name.
The input name.
• Floating Point Value.
The input actual value.
• Integer Value.
The input actual raw value.
• Low Threshold.
The value under which an alarm will be triggered for this input, if configured to trigger
alarms. Nothing is displayed if the data point is not configured to trigger alarms.
• High Threshold.
The value over which an alarm will be triggered for this input, if configured to trigger alarms.
Nothing is displayed if the data point is not configured to trigger alarms.
• Deadband.
Indicates how much the value must go beyond the low or high threshold to trigger an alarm.
Nothing is displayed if the data point is not configured to trigger alarms.
When a binary inputs or binary outputs branch is selected, the right pane displays the following
information for each binary input:

154 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

 • Name.
The input name.
• State.
The input actual state.
• Alarm.
Indicates it this input is in alarm (1), or not (0). Nothing is displayed if the data point is not
configured to trigger alarms.
• Filter(s).
The appearance and disappearance filters, which respectively indicates how long, in
milliseconds, the binary input must keep the active state (TRUE or 1) before triggering an
alarm, and how long, in milliseconds, the binary input must keep the inactive state (FALSE or
0) before considering that the alarm is no longer active. Nothing is displayed if the data point
is not configured to trigger alarms.
Statistics branches/pages are quite similar to those available through the SMP Stats tool. For more
information about statistics and the SMP Stats tool, see “Viewing Communications Statistics in
Real Time”, page 53.

16.6.7 Performing Control Operations from a Readings Page

As seen previously in the “Creating a User-Defined Readings Page” section, page 138, you can
create touch buttons that allow operators to perform control operations.
When you press such a button, a modal window appears over the Annunciator main display.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 155

 This window is also customizable, as described in the same section. In the snapshot above, the
State 0 button is named Open and the State 1 button is named Close.

To perform a control operation:

 Press either the State 0 or State 1 button:
 To force the corresponding output to state 0 (FALSE), press the State 0 button.
 To force the corresponding output to state 1 (TRUE), press the State 1 button.
 Press Cancel to close this window without forcing the output state.

The control operation window is replaced by a confirmation window.

 Press Execute to proceed with the execution of the control operation.

 Press Cancel to close this window without executing the control operation.
 If you pressed Execute, two entries will be added to the history log: one to indicate that a
control operation has been performed on the given binary output, and another to indicate the
result. The same entries, and more precise information, are also stored in the Control log file,
which can be accessed using the SMP Log tool. For more information about this tool, see
“Viewing the SMP Log Files”, page 45.
 If you press Cancel, the window is closed and no control operation is performed.

16.6.8 Using the Screen Saver

A screen saver can be configured to replace the Annunciator display by a black screen during
periods of inactivity.

16.6.9 To learn how to set up the screen saver, see “Specific

SMP Gateway Requirements for the Touchscreen
Cooper Power Systems recommends the use of a touch screen from Elo TouchSystems with the
SMP Gateways.
The selected touch screen must support Elo TouchSystems drivers for Windows CE 4.2 or later,
and can implement any touchscreen technology except APR and Projected Capacitive.
Setting Up a Screen Saver using SMP Config”, page 147.
To leave screen saver mode, just touch the screen.

156 • Chapter 16: Using the Annunciator Interface

 The screen saver also automatically ends its execution when an alarm occurred, or when the data
point that triggered it return to its normal condition.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 157

17 Automation

Because it is connected between the substation devices and the control centers, the SMP Gateway
is well positioned to implement advanced processing functions that would be impossible to
perform by less sophisticated devices.
The SMP Gateway provides the following automation capabilities:
• The SMP Gateway Automation Functions module, which add basic automation functions.
See “The SMP Gateway Automation Functions Module”, next.
• The SoftPLC module and CoDeSys development platform, which allow the creation of
sophisticated automation scripts, such as closing circuit breakers and load balancing.
See “The SoftPLC Module”, page 159.

17.1 The SMP Gateway Automation Functions

Module
The SMP Gateway Automation Functions module is an optional software package designed to
extend the capabilities of existing devices by adding local automation capabilities similar to what
could be implemented using an external PLC.
For complete details on this module, including the configuration procedures and setting references,
refer to the SMP Gateway Automation Functions Reference Manual.

17.2 The SoftPLC Module

The SoftPLC Module is an optional software module available on all models. Using this module,
you can create automation scripts that access the data points in the SMP Gateway real-time
database in order to create sophisticated control functions.
Since the SoftPLC module is part of the internal architecture of the SMP Gateway, the scripts you
define can be used to:
• create new logic data points, with values based on the result of calculations performed on real
data points;
• process data in real time before sending it to control centers;
• implement sophisticated local automation functions, such as automatic closing of circuit
breakers and load balancing.
The Soft PLC module is provided with the CoDeSys development platform, a complete
development environment that supports the IEC 61131 programming languages:
• Instruction List (IL)

SMP Gateway User Manual • 159

 • Structured Text (ST)
• Function Block Diagram (FBD)
• Continuous Function Chart (CFC)
• Ladder Diagram (LD)
• Sequential Function Chart (SFC)

17.2.1 The CoDeSys Development Environment

CoDeSys is one of the most popular IEC 61131-3 programming systems for PLCs and industrial
controllers. It supports the full range of standard IEC 61131-3 data types, as well as user-defined
data types: arrays, structures, enumerations, aliases and pointers. The tools provide a comfortable
programming environment, with full debugging support.

17.2.2 Using CoDeSys to Create SMP Gateway Automation

Scripts
For complete details on using CoDeSys to create scripts for the SMP Gateway SoftPLC module,
see the SMP Gateway SoftPLC Reference Manual.

160 • Chapter 17: Automation

18 Using Syslog with an
SMP Gateway

Syslog is a method for delivering log information from a sender to a receiver, typically across an
IP network. Typically used for computer system management and security auditing, syslog is
supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms. Because of this,
syslog can be used to integrate log data from many different types of systems into a central
repository. It is then possible for the system administrator to dispatch these messages to email or
SMS systems, for example.
The SMP Gateway syslog component uses the UDP or TCP protocol to send its log entries to a
single receiver. It is configured using SMP Config, and is active as soon as the SMP Gateway
starts up.
For an overview of the messages that an SMP Gateway may send to a syslog receiver, launch
SMP Log and take a look at the various log files’ contents. To learn how to use SMP Log, see
“Viewing the SMP Log Files”, page 45.
The following section describes the few steps to follow to set up syslog on an SMP Gateway.

18.1 Setting up Syslog

Because it is based on the integrated log feature of the SMP Gateway, the syslog feature is easy to
configure on an SMP Gateway. The receiver of the syslog messages must first be specified. If
needed, the facility qualifiers attached to messages can be customized to your needs.

To enable and configure SMP Gateway syslog, proceed as follows:

 In SMP Manager, from the Tools menu, choose SMP Config to open it.
 In the left pane, under the SMP Gateway name branch, expand the System branch.
 Select the Syslog branch, and then select the General branch.

 Specify the general settings of the syslog transmitter:

 Put a checkmark in the Enabled cell.
 In the Time Zone cell, select the time zone used by the receiver server.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 161

  If the server is configured for daylight saving time schedule adjustments, put a
checkmark in the Auto Adjust DST cell.
 If the syslog messages must be transmitted to an application or server that supports the
Common Event Format (CEF), such as ArcSight Logger, select ArcSight CEF in the
Message Format cell; otherwise, select RFC 3164.
 Select the Receiver branch.

 Specify the settings of the intended recipient of all syslog messages that will be issued by the
SMP Gateway:
 In the IP Address cell, type the IP address of the message recipient.
 By default, the SMP Gateway uses the UDP syslog port number 514. To use a different
port number, such as the default TCP syslog port number 601, type it in the Port
Number cell.
 In the Connection Type cell, select the syslog implementation to use between the
following: UDP, TCP, or TCP SSL/TLS.
 If the UDP implementation is used, the source port must also be specified in the Source
Port Number cell. It is recommended to use the port as the one specified in the Port
Number cell.
 If a TCP implementation is used, type the time to wait, in seconds, for new log entries to
become available before transmitting them in a single TCP frame, in the TCP Buffer
Time cell.
 Select the Facilities branch.

 For each SMP Gateway Log File:

 In the Facility cell, specify the facility code that will be assigned to this log file’s entries
in syslog messages. The default settings, as illustrated above, should satisfy your
requirements.

Note: Facility codes are used to distinguish different classes of syslog messages.
These codes are mainly useful for message classification.

 To transmit the log entries of the corresponding log file, clear the Disabled check box.

162 • Chapter 18: Using Syslog with an SMP Gateway

19 Redundancy

The SMP Gateway is a critical component in a substation automation system. Hence, there are
circumstances in which losing an SMP Gateway can severely impact substation operations. With
the redundancy option, you can group two SMP Gateways together in a redundant configuration,
to ensure continued operation of the substation automation system in the event of a failure. If one
gateway fails, the other one takes over. There are different types of redundancies, as IEDs,
SMP Gateways and networks can be redundant in many combinations.
Redundant SMP Gateways are addressed by a SCADA center as if they were a single
SMP Gateway with a single IP address. In the event that one SMP Gateway fails, the second
SMP Gateway immediately becomes active and takes ownership of the logical IP address.
Failover from the active SMP Gateway to the standby SMP Gateway typically takes less than 5
seconds. Network connections from the control center are temporarily lost when the active
gateway goes offline. The control center simply needs to reconnect to the same group IP address
in order to re-establish a new connection and restore system operation.
An additional benefit is that you can update SMP Gateway settings with minimum down time, by
updating the settings of the standby SMP Gateway, which will take over the other SMP Gateway
during its own update.

Note: The redundancy function is not available on the SMP 4 and the SMP 4/DP.

19.1 Redundant Group Operation

In an SMP Gateway redundancy group, one SMP Gateway plays an active role while the other
stands by. The active gateway polls the substation devices and responds to requests from control
centers. The standby gateway initializes itself, places its serial links in a high-impedance state and
waits to become active.
The active SMP Gateway uses a special protocol to send regular heartbeat messages to the standby
SMP Gateway. If the standby SMP Gateway fails to receive these messages, it automatically
assumes that it should become active. Two distinct communications channels are used for the
heartbeat messages, to minimize the chances of both SMP Gateways becoming active due to a
single faulty connection. These channels can be LAN connections, dedicated serial connections, or
a mixture of both.
The two SMP Gateways in a group must have identical configurations and be physically
connected to the same substation devices.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 163

19.1.1 SMP Gateway A and B Designation
You have to designate one SMP Gateway of the group as the SMP Gateway A (as the A unit of an
A-B protection scheme). By default, the first SMP Gateway of the group is designated as
SMP Gateway A.
The _smp___rsGatewayA system binary input indicates if this is the SMP Gateway A (or B).
Moreover, it is possible to give priority to SMP Gateway A, so it takes precedence over
SMP Gateway B.

19.1.2 Giving Priority to SMP Gateway A

It is possible to give SMP Gateway A the priority; in this case, the SMP Gateway A will become
active when there are no error conditions. This setting will cause an additional failover when the
SMP Gateway A recovers from a fault.

19.1.3 Redundant IEDs

To improve reliability of their monitoring systems, utilities can use multiple protection IEDs to
monitor their breakers (also called “A-B protection”). For this matter, they normally use IEDs
from different manufacturers for maximum reliability: if an IED malfunction is caused by a
specific hardware or software design problem, chances are good that the second IED will display
the same erratic behavior.
This type of redundancy is called “IED redundancy”. It is achieved by configuring the
SMP Gateway to poll both IEDs simultaneously with two different masters, using the Best-of
automation function of the gateway to consider only data retrieved from one of the masters.
The following illustration presents a typical failover scenario in a redundant IED configuration.

Figure 19-1 Using the “best of” automation function to support redundant IEDs

The use of the Best-of automation function implies the configuration of three data points for the
same information: one point for each master protocol, and a third point that is configured to store
the result of the automation function. The SCADA should be monitoring the third point, which is
called the “best-of point”. The value and quality of the best-of point is determined as follow:
1. If the quality of the first data point evaluates to OK, then the value of this point is
copied to the best-of data point.
2. Otherwise, if any of the bad quality flags is raised for the first point (communication
failure, bad hardware, etc.) and the quality of the second point evaluates to OK, then
the value of the second point is copied to the best-of point.

164 • Chapter 19: Redundancy

 3. If the quality of both data points is bad, the value and quality of the first point will
be copied to the best-of point.

IED redundancy using the best-of function of the SMP Gateway presents the following
characteristics:
• The best-of automation function can be used with any protocol. It requires the Automation
Function component to be a part of the SMP Gateway license.
• The two IEDs of a redundant pair can use different protocols. For example, the first protection
IED can use DNP3, while the second one uses IEC 60870-5-101, even if there are slight
differences in the data map.
• It is a point-by-point redundancy. This means that it allows for any failure in the acquisition
path, as the logic used to determine the quality and value of the data point is not based on the
current state of the communication link or on the availability state of the IEDs: it is the
responsibility of the automation function component, and it is based on the quality of the
source data points.
• Binary control or analog set points can also be mapped to best-of points. When a control
operation is performed on a best-of output point, it is applied to the first point for which the
quality evaluates to OK, starting with the preferred one (if any).

Note: When two redundant IEDs share the same data map and use the same protocol,
the preferred solution is to use a single master with redundant communication
links. This solution requires less configuration effort, because only one set of data
points is required. In comparison, the best-of solution requires 3 sets of data
points: one for each master/IED and the set of best-of data points.

19.2 Grouping 2 SMP Gateways for Redundancy

Basic SMP Gateway redundancy consists of an active SMP Gateway and a standby
SMP Gateway. The active gateway is polling the devices and communicates with the control
center as if it was a stand-alone system. The active and standby gateways are communicating with
each other so that when the active gateway fails, the standby one becomes active.
Both SMP Gateways share a public IP address to which the control center can connect. This
ensures that no special network configuration is needed at the control center; in fact, when the
control center connects to the public IP-address, it has no indication which gateway is active and
which one is on standby. In the following example, SMP Gateways 10.2.15.1 and 10.2.15.2 are
grouped under the public IP address 10.2.15.3.

Figure 19-2 Typical failover scenario of an SMP Gateway redundancy group

You should know that:

• Each SMP Gateway has its own private IP address.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 165

 • Both SMP Gateways share a public IP address which is assigned to the active gateway.
• Basic failover condition is the detection of a hardware failure on the active SMP Gateway.
• The standby SMP Gateway can still be accessed by its private IP address for maintenance.
• It is possible to force a failover, as explained in the “Forcing an Active SMP Gateway to Fall
on Standby” section, page 172.

19.2.1 Prerequisites
Two SMP Gateways can be grouped together for redundancy if:
• The same version of the software (bootstrap, firmware and application) is installed on both
SMP Gateways;
• Both gateways have the same configuration;
• The redundancy option is included in the license of both SMP Gateways.
• Both gateways are not already part of a redundancy group.
Additionally, if NIC teaming is required, it needs to be configured on both SMP Gateways. For
more information, see “Teaming NICs for Network Fault Tolerance (SMP 16 Only)”, page 175.
Finally, if both SMP Gateways are connected to IEDs through serial links, Y-cables must be used
unless redundancy is also implemented at the device level (see “Redundant IEDs”, page 164).

19.2.2 Setting Up a Redundancy Group Using SMP Manager

SMP Manager is used to create SMP Gateway redundancy groups. The sections that follow
provide an overview of the configuration process.

To create a redundancy group:

 In the SMP Manager window, choose the 2 SMP Gateways you want to group together. Note
that they must be of the same model and have the same configuration file currently loaded.
Select one SMP Gateway, and use the mouse and the SHIFT or CTRL key on your keyboard,
as for any standard Windows selection, to select the second SMP Gateway.
 From the Redundancy menu, choose Group SMP Gateways.

The Group Properties dialog box allows you to specify redundancy settings such as the
virtual IP address, the LAN and serial connections to be used, and the conditions that have to
exist for the SMP Gateways to switch roles.

Redundancy is defined by 3 categories of settings, corresponding to the tabs in the dialog box.

166 • Chapter 19: Redundancy

  In the General settings tab, specify the basic properties of the group:
 The keep-alive settings, i.e., the frequency at which keep-alive messages are to be sent by
the active SMP Gateway (every x milliseconds, where x is between 200 and 10,000), and
the timeout interval after which the standby SMP Gateway presumes that the active
gateway has failed and takes over as the active one (between 600 and 30,000
milliseconds).
 The virtual address and subnet mask used to communicate with the group. The virtual IP
address must be different from the physical IP addresses you set up during the initial
configuration of your SMP Gateways. It identifies the group and is used by the control
center to communicate with the active gateway. If the active gateway fails, the virtual IP
address and subnet mask are assigned to the standby gateway.
 Optionally, the virtual address and subnet mask of the secondary network, if you are
using a secondary network for communication between the SMP Gateways and the
control center.
 Finally, you must determine which SMP Gateway of the group is the A unit of the A-B
pair (the first one will be assigned to this role by default); you can optionally give priority
to this SMP Gateway A.

Note: If the SMP Gateway runs an old version of the SMP Gateway redundancy
software, you will be able to give priority to one of the SMP Gateway of the
group, but not to designate it as the SMP Gateway A.

 Select the Links tab.

The Links tab is used to specify the 2 connections that will be used to link the redundant
SMP Gateways to each other.

These can be any combination of LAN or serial connections. The SMP 16 supports 2 LAN
connections. The active SMP Gateway uses these links to send regular heartbeat messages to

SMP Gateway User Manual • 167

 the standby SMP Gateway. If the standby gateway fails to receive the messages, it
automatically assumes that it should become active. 2 distinct communications links are used,
in order to minimize the chances of both SMP Gateways becoming active due to a single
faulty connection.

 Specify the Links settings:

 The type of first connection: LAN or serial.
 The type of the second connection: LAN or serial.
 The communication mode, either RS-232 or RS-485 (4 wires), if you are using one or
more serial connections between the 2 SMP Gateways.

Warning: To link two SMP 16 using RS-232 or RS-485 (4 wires), use a cable that
follows the pinout specifications found in the installation guide of the
corresponding SMP Gateway model (ex. SMP 16 Installation Guide). Using
a cable with crossed pinout might damage the unit.

 Select the Failover tab.

A failover will automatically happen if the active SMP Gateway faces a major problem, such
as a power failure, that prevents it from sending heartbeat messages.

168 • Chapter 19: Redundancy

  Select the conditions that will trigger a failover. The available conditions are:
• High-temperature alarm (if available).
If selected, a failover will be triggered when the high temperature alarm is triggered. Only
legacy SMP 4-20 and SMP 8-40 models support such an alarm feature.
• Less than “X” % memory available.
If selected, a failover will be triggered when the system available memory falls below the
specified threshold.
• Low voltage alarm.
If selected, a failover will be triggered when the low voltage alarm is triggered.
• LAN trigger.
If this condition is enabled, a failover will be triggered if the active SMP Gateway is unable to
detect the presence of a network through its Ethernet connectors.

To extend this LAN availability check, the SMP Gateway can ping the IP address of the
SCADA, control center or master station that is monitoring the SMP Gateway, instead of
solely detecting network activity. To do so, select the Determine LAN availability by
sending a ping to the following address check box, and enter the IP address below.

The following LAN trigger options are available:

• No LAN connection lost.
Disable the LAN trigger condition: it will not be considered.
• All LANs connections lost.
Trigger a failover when both LAN A and B are unreachable.
• LAN A connection lost.
Trigger a failover when the LAN connected to ENET1 can no longer be reached.
• LAN B connection lost.
Trigger a failover when the LAN connected to ENET2 can no longer be reached.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 169

  Click OK.

SMP Manager sends the settings to both SMP Gateways. You will need to restart both
SMP Gateways to activate redundancy.
 In the Restart Gateway dialog box, choose Shutdown and Restart to have the
SMP Gateways restart in normal mode.

The next screenshot shows two grouped SMP Gateways in SMP Manager:

19.2.3 SMP Manager Redundancy Column

The Redundancy column shows the current state of each SMP Gateway within a redundancy
group. In the previous section example, the second SMP Gateway is on hot standby. This happens
if the data points of the devices connected to the SMP Gateways have been configured for hot
standby (for details, see “Hot Standby”, page 174). There can be several intermediate states, such
as “initial”, “listen” or “speak”, while the grouping takes place. Thereafter, the following states
may be displayed:
• Active.
Indicates that this SMP Gateway is active. It communicates with the field devices and sends
“keep alive” messages at a frequency set through parameter settings. In the event of a failover,
it becomes the standby SMP Gateway.
• Standby.
Indicates that this SMP Gateway is on standby. It listens for “keep alive” messages from the
active SMP Gateway and takes over as the active SMP Gateway if the latter fails to send a
message within the expected number of milliseconds.
• Hot Standby.
Indicates that this SMP Gateway is on hot standby. It listens for “keep alive” messages from
the active SMP Gateway. It also synchronizes all the data points that have been set up for hot
standby in SMP Config. See “Hot Standby”, page 174, for more information about this
particular redundancy feature.
• Partial Hot Standby.
Indicates that this SMP Gateway is on hot standby (see above), but that the SMP Gateways
have different configuration files or that there are some real-time data synchronization issues.
When nothing is displayed, SMP Manager is not able to communicate with the SMP Gateway for
one of the following reasons:
• The SMP Gateway redundancy software is not running because you have not set its
redundancy parameters.
• The redundancy software has not been installed correctly on the SMP Gateway.
• The SMP Gateway is down.

170 • Chapter 19: Redundancy

 This column may also advise you of exceptional situations, as described here:
• Peer IP: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
Indicates that one SMP Gateway of the group is not present in the SMP Gateway list of
SMP Manager. To fix the problem, add the second gateway to the list.
• Too Many SMPs.
There are more than 2 SMP Gateways in this redundancy group. To fix the problem, remove
the excess SMP Gateways.
• Different parameters.
The 2 SMP Gateways in this group do not have the same redundancy settings. See below to
learn how to fix this configuration problem.
• Peer IP: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn => Not in redundancy.
The Peer IP is in the SMP Gateway list, but is not part of the redundancy group. This can
happen if one of the 2 SMP Gateways in the group lose its redundancy configuration.
To fix the problem, ungroup the SMP Gateway that is still in the redundancy group (see
“Ungrouping SMP Gateways”, page 172) and regroup both gateways again.
• Virtual gateway (IP: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).
You have added, to the SMP Gateway list, an SMP Gateway with the virtual IP address you
assigned as the public IP address of the redundancy group. The address of the active gateway
is indicated in parentheses.
The redundancy configuration of all SMP Gateways in the list is retrieved cyclically. This
mechanism allows you to see the current redundancy state of all SMP Gateways, on
SMP Manager main screen. Since the refresh cycle is relatively slow, the redundancy
configuration of a given SMP Gateway is automatically retrieved when the SMP Gateway is
added to the list, when it is restarted, and when one or more files are sent to it.

To refresh the redundancy state of all SMP Gateways:

 From the View menu, choose Refresh.

To update the parameters of grouped SMP Gateways those have different

parameters:
 Click one or both SMP Gateways.
 From the Redundancy menu, choose Group Properties.
 A warning message appears, telling you that SMP Manager will use the default redundancy
settings and asking you if you want to go on. If you reply in the affirmative, the Group
Properties dialog box appears and you can change the settings to your liking. When you
close the dialog box, both SMP Gateways will have the same settings.
 Restart both SMP Gateways to activate the parameters. For each gateway:
 Select the SMP Gateway to restart.
 From the Gateway menu, choose Restart.
 In the Restart Gateway dialog box, select Shutdown and Restart.
 Click OK.

Warning: Do not reset the SMP Gateways by pressing the reset button on the gateway
itself, or you will lose your parameter settings.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 171

19.3 Managing Redundancy
19.3.1 Forcing an Active SMP Gateway to Fall on Standby
To force an active SMP Gateway to fall on standby:
 Using SMP Manager, select the active SMP Gateway in the list.
 From the Redundancy menu, choose Force Standby.

The selected SMP Gateway will enter standby mode, while the other SMP Gateway in the
group will enter active mode.

19.3.2 Additional Failover Conditions

It is possible to define additional failover conditions to have a better control of which
SMP Gateway is active. The failover conditions are defined in the SysServerConfig.txt
file and that file can be uploaded to the SMP Gateway as any other file. In this file, 16 additional
error conditions can be defined which will force a failover. An example file was copied on your
computer hard drive during the SMP Tools’ installation, at the following location:

\Program Files\Cooper Power Systems\SMP

Tools\Documentation\Technical notes

19.3.3 Modifying the Redundancy Settings of an Existing Group

To modify the redundancy settings of an existing group of SMP Gateways:
 In the SMP Gateway list, select one or both SMP Gateways of the group.
 From the Redundancy menu, choose Group Properties.
 Modify the desired settings in the Group Properties dialog box.

For a complete definition of the settings, refer to the “Setting Up a Redundancy Group Using
SMP Manager” section, page 166.

19.3.4 Ungrouping SMP Gateways

To separate 2 SMP Gateways that had been grouped together for redundancy:
 In the SMP Gateway list, select both SMP Gateways.
 From the Redundancy menu, choose Ungroup SMP Gateways.

19.3.5 Testing and Validating the Configuration

SMP Manager displays the current state of both SMP Gateways in a redundancy group. You can
also use SMP Log and SMP Trace to display additional information.
Using SMP Log with both SMP Gateways:
 Verify in the Redundancy folder that one SMP Gateway is stated as active, and that the other
one is stated as “on standby”, waiting for a failover.
For each SMP Gateway, using SMP Stats:

172 • Chapter 19: Redundancy

  In the System folder, open the Redundancy folder to view additional redundancy information
and statuses.

19.3.6 Monitoring Redundancy Status

The GRP LED on the front panel of the SMP 16 displays the redundancy status.
Refer to your SMP Gateway installation guide for details.

19.3.7 Testing a Redundant Network

So far, we have discussed SMP Gateway redundancy. However, with the SMP 16, you can also set
up network redundancy. The SMP Gateways and the control center can communicate via either
network. Next figure illustrates a typical redundant network configuration, where the control
center communicates with an SMP Gateway group through two subnets.

Figure 19-3 Typical failover scenarios in a redundant network configuration

Note: Setting up a redundant network is out of the scope of this document. However,
the following procedure describes how you can use the SMP Tools’ IP address
switching feature to test a redundant network configuration.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 173

 Normally, the control center accesses the primary network and switches to the secondary network
only if the primary network fails. You should therefore make sure the secondary network is
working properly. To do this, you need to switch to the secondary IP address of your
SMP Gateway, and then run SMP Log and SMP Trace.

To switch from the first IP address to the second IP address:

 In SMP Manager, from the Tools menu, choose Use Second Address.
Note that the switch to the second IP address applies not only to the SMP Gateway that is in the
redundant network, but to all the gateways in the list. From this point on, if you launch any SMP
Tools, console or Internet Explorer for any SMP Gateway, these applications will use the second
IP address.

To switch back to the first IP address:

 From the Tools menu, choose Use First Address.
Note that once a tool has been launched, it never switches IP addresses regardless of how many
times you toggle the address selection. Address switching applies only to commands that take
place after you instruct SMP Manager to switch addresses.
Note further, that if there are other models in your SMP Gateway list that support only one IP
address, such as the SMP 4, toggling back and forth between the first and second IP address will
have no effect. You will see the same logs, traces and statistics, regardless of which address you
specify.

19.4 Hot Standby

The SMP Gateway software has the possibility to maintain a complete up-to-date image of the
data of the active SMP Gateway on the standby SMP Gateway. This feature is called “hot
standby”. It is available for the most common master protocols.
Whenever a transition occurs on a hot-standby data point, data point information is first updated in
the real-time database of the active SMP Gateway; it is then transmitted to the standby
SMP Gateway, which updates its own database. Using hot standby, integrity scans are not always
required, since the hot-standby data points are already synchronized, reducing the failover time
significantly.
To configure a master protocol instance for hot standby, refer to the specific protocol manual
found on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM.
To take full advantage of the hot standby, the slave protocol should be configured to be active
anytime, even on standby.

To configure hot-standby for a slave protocol:

 In SMP Config, select the General node of the slave protocol instance.
 In the Hot-Standby Support cell, Disabled should be selected. Instead, select the behavior
that is expected from the slave component, between the following:
• Acquisition.
The slave protocol will receive data from its masters without accepting control
commands from the control center.
• Acquisition and control.
The slave protocol will receive data from its masters and it will accept control commands
from the control center. These commands will be forwarded to the active SMP Gateway,
which will forward the control commands to the devices.

174 • Chapter 19: Redundancy

 The following illustration presents the acquisition data flow for an SMP Gateway redundancy
group that supports hot standby.

1. The active SMP Gateway receives data from the device.

2. The standby SMP Gateway is updated.
3. Data is sent to the control center by both SMP Gateways.

Figure 19-4 Acquisition data flow in a hot standby redundancy SMP Gateway group

Note: The public IP address is always associated with the active SMP Gateway. When
the control center wants to connect to the standby SMP Gateway, it needs to use
the physical IP address.

19.5 Teaming NICs for Network Fault Tolerance

(SMP 16 Only)
All SMP 16 models are equipped with two Network Interface Cards (NICs). You can group both
NICs for network fault tolerance. This process is called NIC Teaming.
The SMP 16 implementation of NIC Teaming cannot be used for load balancing. Its sole purpose
is for network fault tolerance: if one NIC fails, the network connection does not cease and
continues to operate on the other NIC.
To learn how to configure your SMP 16 for NIC Teaming, refer to the SMP 16 Installation Guide,
S1120-13-1, under the “Configuring your TCP/IP settings” section.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 175

20 Setting Up the SNMP
Server

The SNMP server is an optional software module that allows the SMP Gateway to export statistics
using the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) standard.

Note: The SMP Gateway software implements SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.

The SMP Gateway SNMP agent publishes and supports both standard MIBs (management
information bases) that are supported by the Windows CE operating system and custom MIBs that
are supported by the SMP Gateway application. The agent supports extensive reading capabilities
as well as limited writing and trap capabilities.

20.1 SNMP Traps

SNMP traps are messages that are automatically sent to selected SNMP clients when specific,
unusual events occur. They are the text equivalent of alarms. Traps are automatically sent to
listening SNMP clients whenever:
• the SMP Gateway restarts;
• a communications link used by a master or slave protocol instance fails for more than 60
consecutive seconds (these traps are called link down traps);
• a communication link used by a master or slave protocol instance becomes active (these traps
are called link up traps).
In order to send traps, the SMP Gateway needs to know the IP addresses of the SNMP clients that
are listening on the network. You can enter a maximum of 32 SNMP client IP addresses using the
SNMP Manager console application.

20.2 Configuring the SNMP Server

To configure the SNMP server:
 Select the SMP Gateway in SMP Manager.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Console.

The SMP Console tool starts in a new console window.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 177

  Type the following command:

snmpmgr

SNMP manager lists all available commands, as shown next:

\> snmpmgr

SNMP Manager

Available commands (case insensitive):

A Add a client.
R Remove a client.
L Display all clients.
M Modify the community membership of a client.
C Change a client description.
G Add a community.
D Remove a community.
B Display all communities and their permissions.
I Modify the permissions of a community.
T Modify the name of the system contact.
O Modify the location of the gateway on which the agent is
running.
F List information on system contact and gateway location.
W Modify the firewall settings.
H Display the list of all commands.
esc Abort the current operation.
Q Quit.

(H) Help, (Q) Quit:

You can display the previous list any time, by using the H command.
You should specify the SNMP settings in the following order:
• Add communities and their permissions.
• Add a system contact.
• Add a system location.
• Add a number of clients and associate them to communities.
Any modifications you make will be effective the next time the SMP Gateway will restart.

Note: If the integrated firewall is enabled on the SMP Gateway, SNMP services must
be allowed through the firewall. To learn how to open ports and allow services
through the integrated firewall, see “Specifying Firewall Rules”, page 98.

178 • Chapter 20: Setting Up the SNMP Server

21 Time Adjustment

This chapter describes the different time adjustment features of the SMP Gateway.

21.1 Monitoring Time Information

The SMP Gateway offers multiple ways to monitor the time information and statuses:
• Some system data points provide time information. They are all prefixed by “_smp___clock”
and are visible using the SMP Gateway Web server (see “Using a Web Browser to View Data
in Real Time”, page 57). For more information on system data points and an exhaustive list of
time-specific points, see “Appendix A - System Data Points”, page A-1.
• Current data and time can also be seen in SMP Stats, in the Vital System Information folder,
from the Internals folder located in the System folder. For more information on
SMP Gateway statistics, see “Viewing Communications Statistics in Real Time”, on page 53.
• SMP 16 time information is displayed on the gateway front panel, using the SYNC LED. For
a complete description of the different SYNC LED states, refer to the gateway installation
guide on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM.
• Also for the SMP 16 model, more precise time information can be seen in SMP Stats, in the
Clock folder, from the Internals folder located in the System folder.

21.2 Setting the SMP Gateway Internal Clock

The SMP Gateway has a real-time clock installed, with battery backup. It is set once during the
installation. If the clock does not indicate the accurate time or was not set right, you can change it
manually, using SMP Manager.

Note: If the SMP Gateway is synchronized by a GPS clock or any other external time
source, setting time manually will not work.

To set the SMP Gateway clock using SMP Manager:

 Start SMP Manager.
 Select the SMP Gateway for which you want to adjust time.
 From the Gateway menu, choose Set Time.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 179

  Select whether the SMP Gateway clock will be set to UTC or Local Time.
 If you selected Local Time, select the time zone to use for the time conversion. Select Apply
daylight saving time if needed.

Note: Daylight saving time automatic adjustment is not supported by the

SMP Gateway. If you use local time on your SMP Gateway, you must manually
adjust the gateway internal clock at every DST clock shift.

The time at which the clock will be set is displayed just above the buttons.
 If it is as expected, click OK to set the SMP Gateway clock to this date and time.
The SMP Gateway internal clock is not an atomic clock, which means that it drifts from actual
time. Over time, data timestamps become less accurate. Moreover, manual time adjustment using
SMP Manager displays an accuracy of ±1 second. Consequently, time adjustment via an external
source is highly recommended for the SMP Gateway to provide accurate timestamps. This is the
topic of the next section.

21.3 Automatic Clock Adjustment

By configuring the SMP Gateway for automatic clock adjustment, you no longer have to worry
about internal clock drifting. All I/O changes, logs, traces and other data provided by the
SMP Gateway are time-tagged with a greater degree of accuracy - typically one second or better.
There are four ways to adjust the internal clock automatically:
• Directly from a GPS signal, if you have an SMP 16 pre-installed with the GPS clock option.
You must then have a GPS antenna receiving the highly accurate satellite signal.
• Using an external source, such as an IRIG-B signal. It may come from another GPS antenna
connected to another device that redistributes demodulated or modulated IRIG-B. It may also
come from another SMP 16 equipped with the GPS clock option that distributes IRIG-B to
your SMP Gateway.
• Directly from an SNTP server. SNTP stands for Simple Network Time Protocol, and is briefly
presented in section “About GPS, IRIG-B and SNTP”, below.
• Using a SCADA protocol, such as DNP3.
Here is a list of the possible time adjustment solutions that are available for the different
SMP Gateway types:

180 • Chapter 21: Time Adjustment

 SNTP Modulated Demodulated
SMP Gateway model Protocol v4 IRIG-B IRIG-B GPS

SMP 4 √ √ - - -

SMP 4/DP √ √ - * -

SMP 16/CP √ √ √ √ G

SMP 16/SG √ √ √ √ G

Legend: √ = Available, G = with the SMP 16 GPS clock option, * = .Planned for a future release
Table 21-1 Time adjustment solutions available for each model

Note: Only one time adjustment solution should be implemented at a time for an
SMP Gateway.

These different solutions are presented in the next sections.

21.3.1 About GPS, IRIG-B and SNTP

Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation system operated and maintained
by the U.S. Department of Defense (DoD). GPS uses a constellation of satellites to calculate the
exact position and altitude of GPS receiver stations.
GPS technology requires a very accurate time source in order to calculate the orbital position of
the satellites and determine the position of the receiver. To ensure the required level of accuracy,
each GPS satellite is equipped with 4 atomic clocks that are kept in synchronization with the
Master Clock of the U.S. Naval Observatory. Each satellite continuously transmits its current
position and a time code. This time code can be used to synchronize the SMP Gateway, if
equipped with the appropriate hardware.
IRIG-B is a military standard of the Inter Range Instrumentation Group. The best known IRIG
standard is the IRIG Timecode standard used to timestamp video, film, telemetry, radar, and other
data collected at test ranges. The main difference between the codes that are classified in letters
from A to H is their bit rate, which varies between 1 pulse per second and ten thousand pulses per
second. The IRIG-B standard operates at 100 pulses per second.

Note: IRIG-B signals come in two flavors: demodulated and modulated. Demodulated
IRIG-B signals cannot be carried over long distances while the modulated IRIG-B
can be carried over distances larger than 350 meters (1000 feet) without
degrading.

NTP stands for Network Time Protocol, and is a standard Internet protocol used to synchronize the
clocks of computers to a time reference. NTP was originally developed by Professor David L.
Mills of the University of Delaware. As a full implementation of the NTP protocol seemed too
complicated for many systems, a simplified version of the protocol was defined: SNTP (Simple
Network Time Protocol). SNTP is basically NTP minus certain internal algorithms that are not
required by all types of servers.

Note: The SMP Gateway software implements SNTP version 4 (RFC 2030).

SMP Gateway User Manual • 181

21.3.2 Configuring the SMP 16 GPS Clock Option
The SMP 16 GPS clock option uses the time information provided by the GPS system to provide a
highly accurate time source for the substation.
Setting up the GPS clock option is explained in detail in the SMP 16 GPS Clock Option
Installation Guide, S1120-13-3, which is included on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-
ROM.

To complete the GPS clock option configuration, using SMP Config:

 Under the System branch, select Time, and then select GPS Synchronization.
 In the Cable Length cell, type the total length, in meters, of the cable that links the
SMP Gateway to the GPS antenna. By default, a 25 m length is specified.

Specifying a precise cable length is essential to get the best accuracy possible during the
synchronization process.

21.3.3 Using IRIG-B for Internal Clock Adjustment

If your SMP Gateway supports IRIG-B and is not equipped with a GPS clock, the preferred time
adjustment solution is to use an external IRIG-B time source.
Setting up IRIG-B is described in the installation guide of your SMP Gateway, which is included
on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM.
If your IRIG-B source provides its time information as “local” time, instead of UTC, some
software configuration is required on the SMP Gateway, as the gateway internally uses UTC.

To set up IRIG-B synchronization in the SMP Gateway configuration:

 Under the System branch, select Time, and then IRIG-B Synchronization.
 In the Time Zone cell, select the time zone of the IRIG-B source.
 Select the Auto Adjust DST check box if the IRIG-B source is automatically adjusted for
daylight savings.

21.3.4 Setting Up the SMP Gateway as an SNTP Client

Another alternative is to configure the SMP Gateway as an STNP client.

To set up the SMP Gateway as an SNTP client:

 Start SMP Config.
 Under the System branch, select SNTP, and then Client.

182 • Chapter 21: Time Adjustment

  Select the Enabled check box.
 Under Server Address, enter the SNTP server IP address or network name.
 Type the Refresh rate, which is the frequency, in minutes, at which the SMP Gateway will
connect to the SNTP server in order to be resynchronized.
 Type the Recovery Refresh rate, which is the frequency, in minutes, at which the
SMP Gateway will retry to connect to the SNTP server following a connection failure. This
value must be smaller than the normal Refresh rate.
 Type the Maximum Time Variance allowed, which is the maximum time difference
allowed, in minutes, between the new time provided by the server and the actual time of the
SMP Gateway. If the difference is larger, the time update is ignored; this mechanism prevents
the use of an invalid time source.

Note: Specify a Maximum Time Variance of 0 to allow SMP Gateway clock

synchronization with an SNTP server without any consideration to the time
difference between both clocks.

21.3.5 Using the Time Adjustment Feature of a SCADA Protocol

When no external time source is available to the SMP Gateway, the SCADA or control center can
itself serves as a time source, if the protocol it uses to communicates with the gateway supports
time adjustment (synchronization). DNP3 and IEC 60870-5-104 are such protocols.
As each protocol has its own distinctive characteristics, refer to the protocol documentation found
on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM to learn how to enable this protocol-specific
feature.

21.4 Using the SMP Gateway as a Time Source

Following the August 2003 blackout, NERC has recommended that substation devices be
synchronized using a GPS clock. When the SMP Gateway is synchronized by an accurate time
source such as an external IRIG-B source or an internal GPS clock, it can distribute accurate time
to substation devices in one of the following ways:
• Through a modulated or demodulated IRIG-B signal.
• By acting as an SNTP server; the SMP Gateway software implements version 4 of the SNTP
protocol (RFC 2030).
• Using a master protocol, such as DNP3, IEC 60870-5-101 or IEC 60870-5-104. The accuracy
may be limited by the protocol, but the overall synchronization of all the devices is typically
accurate to within one second.
A slight delay may be introduced in the time information transmitted to devices. Output time
accuracy is function of the type of time input used to adjust the SMP Gateway internal clock, and
of the type of protocol or signal used to synchronize the devices. The resulting delays are
presented in the following table.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 183

 Output Delay Accuracy (± ms)
Protocol SNTP Modulated Demodulated
Output v4 IRIG-B IRIG-B
Output Output Output
Protocol Input 500 500 - -

SNTP Input 500 100 - -

Modulated 500 100 10 10

IRIG-B Input
Demodulated 500 100 10 1
IRIG-B Input
GPS Input 500 100 10 1

Table 21-2 Time distribution delays

For example, if the SMP Gateway is time-adjusted using demodulated IRIG-B, a device clock
adjusted by the gateway using demodulated IRIG-B may show a delay of ± 1 milliseconds. Note
that the SMP Gateway can be more accurate: consider these values as “worst case scenarios”.
Also, the SMP Gateway does not perform accurate time-tagging when I/O changes are received
from a device, because the transmission delay is unpredictable. For the time tag to be accurate, the
device must time-tag the I/O changes itself.
The following sections present the various time distribution features of the SMP Gateway.

21.4.1 Configuring IRIG-B Time Distribution

IRIG-B time distribution is the ability, for an SMP Gateway, to distribute time adjustment
information to various devices using IRIG-B signals.
Unlike using SNTP or the time adjustment feature of a master protocol, IRIG-B time distribution
requires the SMP Gateway to be time-adjusted by a reliable source such as an IRIG-B signal or by
GPS.
Setting up IRIG-B is described in the installation guide of your SMP Gateway, which is included
on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM.
Some additional configuration may be required, using SMP Config.

To specify the availability of the IRIG-B output signal:

 Under the System branch, select Time, and then IRIG-B Distribution.

 In the Output Signal Availability cell:

 Select When synchronized with IRIG-B or GPS to prevent IRIG-B distribution when
the SMP Gateway is not currently synchronized with a time source.

OR

184 • Chapter 21: Time Adjustment

 Select Always to distribute the IRIG-B signal regardless of the current synchronization
state of the SMP Gateway. This option should only be used temporarily, for testing
purpose for example, as the accuracy of the signal cannot be guaranteed under this
condition.

If the SMP Gateway is time-adjusted using IRIG-B:

 Under the System branch, select Time, and then IRIG-B Distribution.
 To reuse the IRIG-B input signal “as-is”, without any changes, as the IRIG-B output signal,
select Forward Input Signal. The Format, Time Zone, and Auto Adjust DST settings will
be ignored by the SMP Gateway software.
 Otherwise, specify how the conversion settings of the input signal:
 In the Format cell, select the IRIG-B format to which the IRIG-B input signal should be
converted.
 In the Time Zone cell, select the time zone to use for the IRIG-B output signal.
Essentially, it should be the time zone of the area where your substation is located.
 If required, select Auto Adjust DST to update the IRIG-B output signal for daylight
savings.

If the SMP Gateway is time-adjusted using GPS:

 Under the System branch, select Time, and then IRIG-B Distribution.
 In the Format cell, select the IRIG-B format to which the GPS time information should be
converted.
 In the Time Zone cell, select the time zone to use for the GPS time information. Essentially,
it should be the time zone of the area where your substation is located.
 If required, select Auto Adjust DST to update the GPS time information for daylight savings.

If the SMP Gateway is part of a redundancy group:

 Under the System branch, select Time, and then IRIG-B Distribution.
 To distribute time information even while the SMP Gateway is on-standby, select At System
Boot from the Activation cell.
 Otherwise, select When system has successfully started from the Activation cell.

21.4.2 Setting up the SMP Gateway to Act as an SNTP Server

If some devices can be configured as SNTP clients, the SMP Gateway can itself be configured to
act as an SNTP server for these devices.

Note: To configure the devices as SNTP clients, refer to the user manual of each
device.

To set up the SMP Gateway as an SNTP server:

 Start SMP Config.
 Under the System branch, select SNTP, and then Server.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 185

  Select the Enabled check box.
 Select from the Accessible From list box whether it will be accessible from any computer or
a specific one through the SMP Gateway integrated firewall.
 If you selected Specific computer or subnet, type an address or an address range in the last
cell.

21.4.3 Adjusting Devices Clocks Using Master Protocols

Some devices may not be able to retrieve information from an STNP server or an IRIG-B time
source. However, if the communications protocols used by the SMP Gateway to communicate
with these devices support some sort of time adjustment/synchronization feature, it can be used to
adjust these devices’ clock.
As each protocol has its own distinctive characteristics, refer to the protocol documentation found
on the SMP Gateway Software and Tools CD-ROM to learn how to enable this protocol-specific
feature.

186 • Chapter 21: Time Adjustment

22 SMP Tools Remote Access
to the SMP Gateway

You may want the SMP Tools to connect to an SMP Gateway that is not itself connected to your
network. You would typically do this by setting up a dial-up connection and using a modem to call
the SMP Gateway from your PC running Windows Vista or Windows XP. Less typically, you
might choose to access the SMP Gateway by setting up a direct serial connection between a serial
port on your PC and a serial port or the CONSOLE port on the SMP Gateway from your PC
running Windows Vista or Windows XP.
This section explains how to set up dial-up and direct serial connections between a personal
computer and an SMP Gateway. The procedure differs slightly, depending on whether the
SMP Tools run under Windows Vista or Windows XP.

22.1 Windows Vista Setup Procedure

If the SMP Tools run under Windows Vista, use the procedures outlined in this section to:
• Set up a dial-up (modem) connection between the PC and the SMP Gateway.

Note: Windows Vista does not support direct serial connections. For more information,
see “Incoming Direct Serial Connections and Windows Vista”, page 190.

22.1.1 Setting Up a Dial-Up (Modem) Connection

This section contains the procedure for setting up a dial-up (modem) connection between a PC
running Windows Vista, and an SMP Gateway.
If security features are activated on your SMP Gateway, you must first make sure your computer
is authorized to access the SMP Gateway and that you selected the Remote Access privilege for
the Guests group in the Local Security Database Security Editor, accessible from the Security
menu of SMP Manager (see “Accessing the Local Security Database Editor”, page 90).

SMP Gateway User Manual • 187

 You must perform the steps in the order presented in the table.

Step To do this Follow these steps:

1 Set up the Perform these steps for each SMP Gateway with which you want to
SMP Gateway to communicate via modem.
accept a dial-up
1. Start SMP Manager. Select the SMP Gateway to be configured and
connection
from the File menu, choose SMP Gateway Properties. In the
Gateway Properties dialog box, clear the Automatically Poll SMP
Status at startup check box. This will prevent polling on the dialup
connection.
2. From the Tools menu, choose SMP Console.
3. Type RASMGR to start the RAS Manager application.
4. Type L, to display the device list. The device list is actually the list of
ports available on the SMP Gateway, including the CONSOLE port.
5. Type M, to modify the SMP Gateway COM port you intend to use for
the dial-up connection.
6. Type the number of the “MODEM device” to be modified. Note that
you cannot specify the number of the CONSOLE port, as the latter
does not support modem connections.
7. All the default settings should be correct, except for the last one: Use
device for incoming connections. Type Y to allow incoming
connections on the port and exit RASMGR.
8. Press Q to exit RAS Manager, and then close the console window.

2 Install the 1. From Windows’ Start menu, access the Control Panel.
modem, if
2. Click Hardware and sound.
necessary
3. Click Device Manager.
4. Click Continue.
5. Click on the name of your PC in the three views.
6. Click the Action menu then scan for hardware changes.
7. If the modem is supported by Vista, it will configure itself. If this
does not work, consult the modem’s manufacturer manual.

188 • Chapter 22: SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway
 Step To do this Follow these steps:

3 Set up a new Perform these steps for each SMP Gateway with which you want to
dial-up (modem) communicate via modem.
connection for
1. From Windows’ Start menu, access the Control Panel.
the
SMP Gateway 2. Click Network and Internet.
3. Click Network and Sharing Center.
4. Click Set up a connection or network.
5. In the Wizard dialog box, select Set up a dial-up connection then
click Next.
6. If you have only one modem, skip this point. Click on the modem
you wish to use to connect.
7. Type the phone number you will dial to connect to the SMP Gateway
and a useful name then click Connect. Windows Vista will try to
connect to the device for real.
8. During the connection attempt, click Skip.
9. Click Set up the connection anyway.
10. Click Finish.
11. Click Manage network connections.
12. Right-click the Dial-up Connection just created and select Rename.
Write a useful name then press return.
13. Right-click the Dial-up Connection just created and select
Properties.
14. From the General tab, select the modem you want to use for this
connection and click Configure.
15. In the Modem Configuration dialog box, select the Enable
hardware flow control check box, the Enable modem error
control check box and the Enable modem compression check box.
Then press Ok.
16. Click the Options tab, and then click PPP Settings.
17. In the PPP Settings dialog box, select the Enable LCP extensions
check box and the Enable software compression check box. Clear
the Negotiate multi-link for single link connections check box.
Click OK.
18. Click the Networking tab.
19. Under This connection uses the following items, clear the Client
for Microsoft Networks check box.
20. Click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and click
Properties.
21. In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog
box, click Advanced.
22. In the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box, clear the Use default
gateway on remote network check box and the Use IP header
compression check box and click OK three times.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 189

 Step To do this Follow these steps:

4 Configure 1. Start SMP Manager. Select the SMP Gateway to be configured and
SMP Manager from the File menu, choose SMP Gateway Properties.
to communicate
2. In the Gateway Properties dialog box, type a significant name for
with the
the new SMP Gateway, such as “SMP Gateway via modem”.
SMP Gateway
3. In the First IP Address box, type the IP pool starting address that
you specified when you installed your SMP Gateway (see your
SMP Gateway installation guide).
4. Do not type anything in the Second IP Address box. Click Add.
Note that even if you set up a number of SMP Gateways to communicate
via a dial-up connection, the PC will be able to communicate with only
one SMP Gateway at a time, and will use the addresses specified here.

Table 22-1 Setting up a dial-up (modem) connection under Windows Vista

22.1.2 Incoming Direct Serial Connections and Windows Vista

Windows Vista does not support direct incoming connections that either use a serial cable or an
infrared link. To work around this behavior, Microsoft recommends the use of an Ethernet
connection, a wireless connection, or a home phone network adapter (HPNA) technology
connection.
For more information, visit the Microsoft Website at the following URL:

http://support.microsoft.com/kb/930086

22.2 Windows XP Setup Procedures

If the SMP Tools run under Windows XP, use the procedures outlined in this section to:
• set up a dial-up (modem) connection between the PC and the SMP Gateway;
• set up a direct serial connection between the PC and the SMP Gateway.

22.2.1 Setting Up a Dial-Up (Modem) Connection

This section contains the procedure for setting up a dial-up (modem) connection between a PC
running Windows XP, and an SMP Gateway.
If security features are activated on your SMP Gateway, you must first make sure your computer
is authorized to access the SMP Gateway and that you selected the Remote Access privilege for
the Guests group in the Local Security Database Security Editor, accessible from the Security
menu of SMP Manager (see “Accessing the Local Security Database Editor”, page 90).

190 • Chapter 22: SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway
 You must perform the steps in the order presented in the table.

Step To do this Follow these steps:

1 Set up the Perform these steps for each SMP Gateway with which you want to
SMP Gateway to communicate via modem.
accept a dial-up
1. Start SMP Manager. Select the SMP Gateway to be configured and
connection
from the File menu, choose SMP Gateway Properties. In the
Gateway Properties dialog box, clear the Automatically Poll SMP
Status at startup check box. This will prevent polling on the dialup
connection.
2. From the Tools menu, choose SMP Console.
3. Type RASMGR to start the RAS Manager application.
4. Type L, to display the device list. The device list is actually the list of
ports available on the SMP Gateway, including the CONSOLE port.
5. Type M, to modify the SMP Gateway COM port you intend to use for
the dial-up connection.
6. Type the number of the “MODEM device” to be modified. Note that
you cannot specify the number of the CONSOLE port, as the latter
does not support modem connections.
7. All the default settings should be correct, except for the last one: Use
device for incoming connections. Type Y to allow incoming
connections on the port and exit RASMGR.
8. Press Q to exit RAS Manager, and then close the console window.

2 Install the 1. From Windows’ Start menu, access the Control Panel.
modem, if
2. Double-click Phone and Modem Options.
necessary
3. In the Phone and Modem Options dialog box, click the Modems
tab.
If the modem you plan to use appears in the list, skip the rest of this step
and proceed to the next item in the table, since your modem is already
installed.
4. Click Add.
5. In the Add Hardware Wizard dialog box, allow Windows to detect
your modem automatically, and then click Next.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 191

 Step To do this Follow these steps:

6. Insert the installation CD for the modem driver, if you have one.
7. In the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box, choose whether
you want Windows to install the driver automatically or from a
specific location and click Next.
8. Once Windows advises you that it has installed the driver, click
Finish.
9. Click Finish to close the Add Hardware Wizard dialog box.
10. Click OK to close the Phone and Modem Options dialog box.

3 Set up a new Perform these steps for each SMP Gateway with which you want to
dial-up (modem) communicate via modem.
connection for
1. From Windows’ Start menu, access the Control Panel.
the
SMP Gateway 2. Double-click Network Connections.
3. Double-click New Connection Wizard.
4. In the New Connection Wizard dialog box, click Next.
5. Select Connect to the network at my workplace and click Next.
6. Select Dial-up connection and click Next.
7. If your PC is only equipped with a single modem, skip this step.
Otherwise, select the modem you want to use for this connection, and
click Next.
8. Type a descriptive name for the connection and click Next.
9. Type the phone number you will dial to connect to the SMP Gateway
and click Next.
10. If your PC is not equipped with a smart card slot, skip this step.
Otherwise, the wizard will ask you if you want the use a smart card to
log you into the remote network. Select the option that suits you the
most and click Next (by default, the Do not use my smart card
option is selected).
11. Under Create this connection for, select Anyone’s use, click Next
and click Finish.
12. In the Connect <Connection Name> dialog box, click Properties.
13. From the General tab, select the modem you want to use for this
connection and click Configure.
14. In the Modem Configuration dialog box, select the Enable
hardware flow control check box, the Enable modem error
control check box and the Enable modem compression check box.
15. Click the Networking tab, and then click Settings.
16. In the PPP Settings dialog box, select the Enable LCP extensions
check box and the Enable software compression check box. Clear
the Negotiate multi-link for single link connections check box.
Click OK.
17. Under This connection uses the following items, clear the Client
for Microsoft Networks check box.
18. Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties.
19. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box, click

192 • Chapter 22: SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway
 Step To do this Follow these steps:
Advanced.
20. In the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box, clear the Use default
gateway on remote network check box and the Use IP header
compression check box and click OK, three times
21. Close the Connect <Connection Name> dialog box.

4 Configure 1. Start SMP Manager. Select the SMP Gateway to be configured and
SMP Manager from the File menu, choose SMP Gateway Properties.
to communicate
2. In the Gateway Properties dialog box, type a significant name for
with the
the new SMP Gateway, such as “SMP Gateway via modem”.
SMP Gateway
3. In the First IP Address box, type the IP pool starting address that
you specified when you installed your SMP Gateway (see your
SMP Gateway installation guide).
4. Do not type anything in the Second IP Address box. Click Add.

Note that even if you set up a number of SMP Gateways to communicate

via a dial-up connection, the PC will be able to communicate with only
one SMP Gateway at a time, and will use the addresses specified here.

Table 22-2 Setting up a dial-up (modem) connection under Windows XP

22.2.2 Setting Up a Direct Serial Connection

The following table outlines the procedure for setting up a direct serial connection between a PC
running Windows XP, and an SMP Gateway.
You must perform the steps in the order presented in the table.

Step To do this Follow these steps:

1 Set up the By default, an incoming direct connection is supported on

SMP Gateway to SMP Gateway CONSOLE port: skip to step 2 if you want to use this
accept a direct port; to allow an incoming direct connection on any other port, proceed
connection as follows:
1. In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateway to be configured.
2. From the Tools menu, choose SMP Console.
3. Type RASMGR to start the RAS Manager application.
4. Type L, to display the device list. The device list is actually the list
of ports on the SMP, including the CONSOLE port.
5. Type M, to modify the SMP Gateway COM port you will use for the
direct connection.
6. Type the number of the “DIRECT device” to be modified.
7. All the default settings should be OK, except for the last one: Use
device for incoming connections. Type Y to allow incoming
connections on the port.
8. Press Q to exit RAS Manager, and then close the console window.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 193

 Step To do this Follow these steps:

2 Add a 1. From Windows’ Start menu, access the Control Panel.

communications
2. Double-click Phone and Modem Options.
cable between the
PC and the 3. In the Phone and Modem Options dialog box, click the Modems
SMP Gateway tab. Click Add.
4. In the Add Hardware Wizard dialog box, select the Don’t detect
my modem; I will select it from a list check box. Click Next.
5. Under Manufacturer, select Standard Modem Types.
6. Under Models, click Communications cable between two
computers. Click Next.
7. Click Selected ports.
8. Click the communications port (COM1 or COM2) you want to use
for the communications cable.
9. Click Next, and then click Finish.
10. Click OK to close the Phone and Modem Options dialog box.
11. Connect the communications cable to both ports.

3 Set up a new 1. From Windows’ Start menu, access the Control Panel.
direct serial
2. Double-click Network Connections.
connection to the
SMP Gateway 3. Double-click New Connection Wizard.
4. In the New Connection Wizard dialog box, click Next.
5. Select Set up an advanced connection. Click Next.
6. Select Connect directly to another computer. Click Next.
7. Select Guest. Click Next.
8. Type a descriptive name for the connection. Click Next.
9. In the Select a device drop-down list, click Communications cable
between two computers. Click Next.
10. Under Create this connection for, click Anyone’s use. Click Next.
Click Finish.
11. In the Connect <Connection Name> dialog box, click Properties.
12. From the General tab, click Configure.
13. In the Maximum speed drop-down list, select 115200 bps.
14. Clear the Enable hardware flow control check box. Click OK.
15. Click the Networking tab, and then click Settings.
16. In the PPP Settings dialog box, clear the Enable LCP extensions
check box, the Enable software compression check box, and the
Negotiate multi-link for single link connections check box. Click
OK.
17. Under This connection uses the following items, clear the Client
for Microsoft Networks check box.
18. Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties.
19. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box, click
Advanced.

194 • Chapter 22: SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway
 Step To do this Follow these steps:

20. In the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box, clear the Use default
gateway on remote network check box and the Use IP header
compression check box. Click OK three times.
21. Close the Connect <Connection Name> dialog box.

4 Configure 1. Start SMP Manager. Select the SMP Gateway to be configured and
SMP Manager to from the File menu, choose SMP Gateway Properties.
communicate
2. In the Gateway Properties dialog box, type a significant name for
with the
the new SMP Gateway, such as “SMP Gateway direct connection”.
SMP Gateway
3. In the First IP Address box, type the IP pool starting address that
you specified when you installed your SMP Gateway (see your
SMP Gateway installation guide on the SMP Gateway Software &
Tools CD-ROM).
4. Do not type anything in the Second IP Address box.
5. Click Add.
The PC will communicate with the SMP Gateway using the addresses
specified here.

Table 22-3 Setting up a direct serial connection under Windows XP

SMP Gateway User Manual • 195

23 Using a Dial-Up Connection
for DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-
101

The SMP Gateway could need a dialup connection for DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101 protocols in a
situation where there is no network between the SMP Gateway and the control center and you
cannot establish a network connection to the SMP Gateway using the procedures described under
“SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway”, page 187.
If the control center uses the DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, you can establish a serial
connection, via a dial-up modem, between the SMP Gateway and the control center. The control
center will call the SMP Gateway.
The same holds true if you need to communicate between the SMP Gateway and a device that uses
DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101and that supports a modem connection. The SMP Gateway will call the
device.
Communication via modem is available on the SMP 16 model, and is available as an option on the
SMP 4 and SMP 4/DP models. Note that will all SMP Gateway models, you can always plug an
external modem into any serial port.
Having the SMP Gateway communicates, via dial-up modem with a PC or a device using DNP3
or IEC 60870-5-101, requires that you perform the following configuration steps using
SMP Config:
• Define which serial ports have a modem.
• Create a modem pool.
• Add modems to the pool.
• Create a modem pool master connection if the SMP Gateway will call a device, or create a
modem pool slave connection if the control center will call the SMP Gateway.

23.1 Specifying Which Serial Ports Have Modems

To indicate that a modem is connected to a specific serial port:
 Start SMP Config from the SMP Manager window.
 In the left pane, click Serial Ports.
 In the right pane, in the Interface drop-down list of the corresponding serial port, click
Modem Asynchronous.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 197

23.2 Creating a Modem Pool
A modem pool manages a certain number of physical modems so that when an outgoing call is to
be made, the pool selects an available modem to perform the call. Similarly, when an incoming
call is received, the pool identifies the caller and dispatches the call to the appropriate connection
(eventually to the protocol component).
There must be at least one modem per pool.
When it receives an incoming call, a modem pool needs to identify the caller in order to dispatch
the call to the appropriate protocol component. Since the identification is protocol-specific, each
protocol has its own method for identifying the caller. The identification procedure returns the
caller DEVICE ADDRESS. This DEVICE ADDRESS is then compared with the DEVICE
ADDRESS of each modem pool slave connection connected to the pool. Note that a modem pool
slave connection DEVICE ADDRESS is set by the protocol components. When a match is found,
the communication path is set up from the modem pool slave connection to the modem.
Identification is performed by the Call Dispatcher. The identification procedure for each protocol
supported is specified in the table next.

Protocol Identification Procedure

IEC 60870-5-101 The Call Dispatcher sends an IEC 60870-5-101 RESET OF LINK
broadcast frame. The slave device is expected to respond with an ACK
frame containing its own DEVICE ADDRESS.

DNP3 The Call Dispatcher sends a DNP3 RESET OF LINK broadcast frame.
The slave device is expected to respond with an ACK frame containing
its own DEVICE ADDRESS as the source address.

Table 23-1 Caller identification procedures in regard to the protocol used

To add a modem pool:

 In the left pane, click Serial Ports, then on Modem Pools.
 In the right pane, type the name of the pool.
 Edit the modem pool settings.

These settings set up the behavior of the Call Dispatcher, as described in the next table.

Setting Description

Type The communications protocol supported by the modem pool. The

default value – automatic – means that the supported protocol will be
determined automatically.
Allowed values: Automatic
IEC 60870-5-101
DNP
Default value: Automatic

Dispatcher Address Size The size of the DEVICE ADDRESS, in bytes. This setting is taken into
account when a frame is sent or received, since it affects the size of the
frame.
Range: 1 to 8
Default value: 1

198 • Chapter 23: Using a Dial-Up Connection for DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101
 Setting Description

Dispatcher Response This setting specifies how much time the dispatcher will wait for the
Timeout reception of a response to a request.
Range: 0 to 60,000 milliseconds
Default value: 10,000 milliseconds

Dispatcher Interchar Delay This setting specifies the maximum time allowed between 2 received
bytes of a frame, for the frame to be considered valid.
Range: 0 to 10,000 milliseconds
Default value: 250 milliseconds

Dispatcher Recover This setting specifies how much time the dispatcher will wait after a
Timeout failure (invalid frame format, etc.), before retrying.
Range: 0 to 10,000 milliseconds
Default value: 1,000 milliseconds

Dispatcher Max Request This setting specifies how many times the dispatcher will try to identify
Retry the device.
Range: 0 to 20
Default value: 3

Table 23-2 Modem pool call dispatcher settings in SMP Config

23.3 Adding a Modem to a Modem Pool

To add a modem to a modem pool:
 In the left pane, click Serial Ports, then on Modems.
 In the right pane, choose a modem pool in the drop-down list for each modem.
This will add the modem to the modem pool.
 Edit the modem settings for each modem (see following table).
 In the left pane, click Asynchronous Serial Ports.
 In the right pane, edit the serial port settings for each modem.
The meaning of each modem setting is given below:

Setting Description

AT Init String This AT string is sent to the serial port to initialize the modem. It should
be a valid AT string to which the modem will respond with an OK.
Default value: ATZ

AT Off-Hook String This AT string is sent to the modem to answer the call when a RING
message is received. The modem must, therefore, be configured to NOT
auto-answer the calls (avoid S0=X, where X is other than 0).
Default value: ATA

SMP Gateway User Manual • 199

 Setting Description

AT Dial String This AT string is prefixed to the phone number and sent to the modem to
make outgoing calls.
Default value: ATDT

AT On-Hook String This AT string is sent to the modem to hang up. After a call has been
completed, the “AT Init String” is always sent to reinitialize the modem.
Default value: ATH0

Incoming Only Put a checkmark if you want the modem to receive incoming calls but
not be able to make outgoing calls. If you do not put a checkmark, the
modem will be able to make and receive calls.
Allowed values: checkmark / no checkmark
Default value: no checkmark

AT Response Timeout Specifies how much time the modem pool will wait for an answer to an
AT string command. There is an exception for the ATDT and ATA
commands, since it can take some time to synchronize the carriers and
complete the call. For these exceptions, the maximum time is set to 3
minutes.
The timeout value depends on the modem and more specifically, on the
response time required for the +++ and ATH commands.
Range: 0 to 60,000 milliseconds
Default value: 5,000 milliseconds

Table 23-3 Modem settings in SMP Config

23.4 Adding a Modem Pool Master Connection

A modem pool master connection is used by a protocol component to make outgoing calls to a
device. This connection makes the link between the protocol component and the modem pool.

To add a modem pool master connection:

 In the left pane, click Connections, then on Modem Masters.
 In the right pane:
 Type the name of the connection.
 Specify, via the drop-down list, the modem pool with which the connection will be
associated. The modems belonging to the specified modem pool will be used to make
outgoing calls for this connection.
 Type the phone number and a supplementary AT initialization string. The phone number
is mandatory and can contain any characters recognized by the modem. See your modem
documentation about the availability and meaning of each dialing option. This setting
cannot contain the ATDT prefix, since the latter is already configured in the modem
settings. The supplementary AT initialization string is an optional AT string that will be
sent to the modem just before the calling ATDTxxx command. This setting can be used
to fine-tune modem options for specific calls, which means that you can override options
specified in the general modem initialization string.

200 • Chapter 23: Using a Dial-Up Connection for DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101
23.5 Adding a Modem Pool Slave Connection
A modem pool slave connection is used by a protocol component to receive incoming calls from a
control center. This connection makes the link between the protocol component and the modem
pool.

To add a modem pool slave connection:

 In the left pane, click Connections, then on Modem Slaves.
 In the right pane:
 Type the name of the connection.
 Specify, via the drop-down list, the modem pool with which the connection will be
associated. Calls received by this modem pool will be dispatched to this connection
component if the DEVICE ADDRESS matches.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 201

24 Updating SMP Gateway
Software and Tools

This chapter explains the software architecture of the SMP Gateway and describes how to update
the SMP Tools and the SMP Gateway software.

24.1 Software Architecture of the SMP Gateway

To configure the SMP Gateway, you use the SMP Tools, software that runs on your computer
under a Microsoft Windows operating system. Inside the SMP Gateway, there are also software
components that need upgrading:
• The SMP Gateway runs on Windows CE, called a firmware, the equivalent of the Windows
operating system hosted on your computer. Other firmware that runs on the SMP Gateway
includes the bootstrap programs and the SMP Gateway application.
• The SMP Gateway application (.app file), which contains your protocol translators and other
gateway software files.
• The configuration file (.par file), which tells the gateway how to communicate with the
computer.
One of the SMP Tools is specialized in carrying files from the computer to the gateway:
SMP Loader.
Consequently, whenever you receive a CD-ROM from Cooper Power Systems (or the contents of
the CD-ROM via FTP access to a download site), you should perform an update of all these pieces
of software. Follow these steps, in the order they are presented:
 Update the PC software, i.e. the SMP Tools (see “Updating the SMP Tools on the PC”,
page 204).
 For each SMP Gateway:
 Update the SMP Gateway firmware (see “Updating the SMP Gateway Firmware”,
page 205).
 Update the SMP Gateway application (see “Updating the SMP Gateway Application”,
page 206).
 Update the SMP Gateway configuration file (see “Updating the Configuration File”,
page 207).
The table below shows the exact order in which you will update the SMP Gateway components,
and the SMP Tool that you will use to perform the update.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 203

 Component to update Tool(s)

Bootstrap programs SMP Manager

(requires version 4.0 or later of the SMP Gateway software already installed)

OR

SMP Loader

Resident diagnostics SMP Manager

Windows CE SMP Manager

SMP Gateway application SMP Manager

Configuration file SMP Config and SMP Manager

Table 24-1 SMP Tools to use to update specific SMP Gateway components

24.2 Version Packs

A version pack is a software package that contains all that is required by SMP Manager to manage
a specific version of the SMP Gateway software. This package includes:
• The corresponding version of SMP Config and 61850 Config, which will be started by
SMP Manager for SMP Gateways that use this specific version of the software.
• The corresponding versions of the SMP Gateway software, which can be uploaded to the
SMP Gateway using SMP Manager.
• The corresponding documentation.
Version packs are integrated with the SMP Tools installer starting with version 5.2. However, for
versions 5.1 or earlier, version packs are available on-demand, from Cooper Power Systems, as
self-extractable files.

24.3 Updating the SMP Tools on the PC

Whenever you receive a new version from Cooper Power Systems, with a new version or release
of the SMP software and tools, you will start by updating the SMP Tools on your PC. Much more
rarely, you may need to update JRE (Java 2 Runtime Environment).

To update the SMP Tools:

 Insert the SMP Software and Tools CD-ROM in your computer CD drive.
 In the Welcome to the SMP Gateway window, click Upgrading.
 There may be specific instructions that apply to the version you were using previously. If so,
follow these instructions before performing the upgrade.
 Click the item you want to upgrade and follow the instructions.

The SMP Tools installer will automatically remove the previous version before installing the
new one.

204 • Chapter 24: Updating SMP Gateway Software and Tools

24.4 Updating the SMP Gateway Software
The functions of the SMP Gateway are provided by a sophisticated embedded software system
that includes a number of components:
• The bootstrap program, which loads the SMP Gateway application and the Windows CE
operating system into memory when the SMP Gateway starts up.
• The Windows CE operating system, which provides real-time system services, network
services, and device drivers.
• The resident diagnostics, which allow you to ensure that the SMP Gateway is working
properly.
• The SMP Gateway application, which implements all the functionalities of the SMP Gateway.

24.4.1 Updating the SMP Gateway Firmware

To update the firmware:
 Update the bootstrap program:

Note: If the Windows CE version number you read from your SMP Gateway using
SMP Stats (for more information, refer to page 53) is older than version 4.0, then
you must use the SMP Loader tool to update the bootstrap (see “SMP Loader”,
page 212).

 In the SMP Manager window, click your SMP Gateway.

 From the Update menu, choose Update SMP Gateway.
 In the Update SMP Gateway dialog box:
 Select Bootstrap.
 In the Select version box, select the version of the bootstrap program to upload to
the SMP Gateway.
 Click OK.
 Click Yes.

SMP Manager transfers the file to your SMP Gateway and then informs you that you
have to restart your SMP Gateway for the new firmware to go into effect.
 In the Restart SMP Gateway dialog box, choose Shutdown and Restart to restart the
SMP Gateway.
 Click OK.

Note: All restarts are automatically logged in SMP Gateway Reset log file. If you want
to, you can type a comment in order to indicate why you restarted the
SMP Gateway. This comment will be included in the log entry.

 Update Windows CE:

 In the SMP Manager window, click your SMP Gateway.
 From the Update menu, choose Update SMP Gateway.
 In the Update SMP Gateway dialog box:

SMP Gateway User Manual • 205

  Select Operating System.
 In the Select version box, select the version of the operating system to upload to the
SMP Gateway.

Note: In the case of the operating system, this version number does not refer to the
version of the Windows CE operating system. This is the version number of the
SMP Gateway software package, which includes a version of Windows CE that is
customized for the SMP Gateway.

 Click OK.
 Click Yes.

SMP Manager transfers the file to your SMP Gateway and then informs you that you
have to restart your SMP Gateway for the new firmware to go into effect.
 In the Restart SMP Gateway dialog box, choose Shutdown and Restart to restart the
SMP Gateway.
 Click OK.
 Update the resident diagnostics. Proceed as for Windows CE, but:
 In the Update SMP Gateway dialog box, select Diagnostics Tools.
 In the Select version box, select the version of the resident diagnostics to upload to the
SMP Gateway.
 Click OK.

SMP Manager transfers the file to your SMP Gateway and then informs you that you
have to restart your SMP Gateway for the new firmware to go into effect.
 In the Restart Gateway dialog box, choose Shutdown and Restart to have the
SMP Gateway restart in normal mode.
 Click OK.

The SMP Gateway will go through a series of startup steps, which will be displayed in
the Status column in SMP Manager.
Once the startup is complete, the Status column will display the current status of the
SMP Gateway. The Status column should display Started. If the Status column shows that the
SMP Gateway did not start up normally, refer to “Troubleshooting”, page 221.

24.4.2 Updating the SMP Gateway Application

Proceed as follows:
 In the SMP Manager window, click your SMP Gateway.
 From the Update menu, choose Update SMP Gateway.
 In the Update SMP Gateway dialog box:
 Select Application.
 In the Select version box, select the version of the application to upload to the
SMP Gateway.
 Click OK.

206 • Chapter 24: Updating SMP Gateway Software and Tools

  Click Yes.

SMP Manager sends the software to the specified SMP Gateway, and then informs you that
you have to restart the SMP Gateway for the new application to go into effect.
 In the Restart Gateway dialog box, choose Shutdown and Restart to have the
SMP Gateway restart in normal mode.
 Click OK.

The SMP Gateway will restart and load the new application.

24.4.3 Updating the Configuration File

The last step in upgrading to a new version of the SMP Gateway software and tools consists of
updating the configuration file.

Note: If you just updated the SMP Gateway application, please wait until the
SMP Gateway completes its startup process, to ensure that SMP Manager starts
the version of SMP Config that corresponds to the new SMP Gateway
application.

To update the configuration file:

 From SMP Manager, start SMP Config and open your configuration file.

The file name in the title bar should have a star (*) beside to inform you there is a change.
 From the File menu, choose Save.

A message box will inform you that the current configuration file will be upgraded to a
current version. A backup is automatically saved, which includes the previous version number
in the file name.
 Send the configuration file to the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager:
 From the Update menu, choose Send Configuration File.

SMP Manager will transfer the file on the SMP Gateway, and then informs you that you
have to restart the SMP Gateway for the new application to go into effect.
 In the Restart Gateway dialog box, choose Shutdown and Restart to have the
SMP Gateway restart in normal mode.
 Click OK.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 207

25 Activating a New License

Whenever you contact Cooper Power Systems to request support for a new device that you want
to connect to your SMP Gateway, or to add support for a particular feature, Cooper Power
Systems will provide you with a new license, which consists in an ID and a key.
A license ID is a user-readable identifier that helps distinguishes one license from another. A
license key is composed of up to 4 character sequences that define the list of software features
supported by the license, such as redundancy, Soft PLC and automation functions. The license key
also contains information about the maximum number of master protocols (one per device) and
slave protocols (one per control center) that are supported.

25.1 Updating the License of an SMP Gateway

Before proceeding, make sure you have the new license information at hand. This information is
usually provided by a Cooper Power Systems’ sales representative, in an email or in a license file.

To update the license of an SMP Gateway:

 Start SMP Manager.
 Select the SMP Gateway to update.
 From the Update menu, choose Update SMP Gateway License.

 Enter the new license information:

 If this information is available as a file, click Browse to open a file browser and locate
the license file.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 209

  Otherwise, type the License ID and Key (2 or 4 rows) in the corresponding boxes.
 (Optional) To verify the features and limitations that are part of the specified license, click
Details.

 Click OK to upload the license information to the SMP Gateway.

 If new protocols and components are now part of the license, update the SMP Gateway
application before restarting the gateway, as described in “Updating the SMP Gateway
Application” page 206.

25.1.1 Protocol Classes

The License Information dialog box contains lots of information, including the maximum
number of master and slave protocols of each class that can be configured according to a given
license.
Protocols are divided into classes according to their respective features and complexity. Here are
the classes in increasing order of complexity, along with some examples:
• Class 1.
Includes commonly-used protocols, such as DNP3, Modicon MODBUS, SEL protocols and
IEC 60870-5.
• Class 2.
Includes, but is not limited to, UCA 2.0, IEEE C37.118, IEC 61850 GOOSE and IEC 61850
(master).
• Class 3.
Currently only includes ICCP and IEC 61850 (slave).

210 • Chapter 25: Activating a New License

26 Miscellaneous SMP Tool
Features

This section presents SMP Manager and SMP Config commands that provide useful capabilities,
and that were not discussed in other sections of the document.

26.1 SMP Manager Features

SMP Manager has a number of handy features:
• Displaying only those SMP Gateways with which SMP Manager is currently in
communication.
(Click Active Gateways from the View menu.)
• Choosing the time display format: local time or UTC.
(Click Options from the Tools menu. See also “Modifying SMP Manager Settings”, below.)
• Exporting your SMP Gateway list.
(Click Export List from the File menu.)
• Importing an SMP Gateway list.
(Click Import list from the File menu.)
Also, some SMP Manager settings can also be customized to your needs, as described in the
following section

26.1.1 Modifying SMP Manager Settings

To modify SMP Manager settings:
 From the Tools menu, choose Options.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 211

  In the Time Display Format box, select the format you want to use to display time
information in SMP Manager:
• Local Time.
Time information obtained from SMP Gateways will be adjusted to the time zone and
daylight saving time information of your PC.
• SMP Gateway UTC.
Time information obtained from SMP Gateways will be displayed as is.
 Clear the Do not prompt for SMP Gateway logon credentials at startup check box if you
want the Login Information window to be displayed upon startup.
 Under IED Manager Suite and Authentication Certificate, you will find settings that are
specific to IMS authentication, which is not covered by this manual. Refer to the Yukon IED
Manager Suite documentation for more information about this settings and IMS
authentication.
 Under Paths, you can change the name and the location of the file containing the list of
SMP Gateways that are currently displayed in SMP Manager. This file has a VEP extension.

26.2 SMP Loader

SMP Loader should be used for the following purposes:
• To update the bootstrap programs.
• You can, in fact, load Windows CE and the resident diagnostics with SMP Loader, but you
should use SMP Manager unless there is a problem.

Note: SMP Loader cannot be used to update the SMP 4/DP software.

When the SMP Gateway is powered up or reset, the following components are started up, in the
order listed:
• The primary bootstrap program.
• The secondary bootstrap program.

212 • Chapter 26: Miscellaneous SMP Tool Features

 • Windows CE.
In order to use SMP Loader, you need to interrupt the startup process before it reaches
Windows CE startup. You accomplish this by putting the SMP Gateway into Command mode.

26.2.1 Setting up SMP Loader

Setting up SMP Loader requires that you go through 3 steps:
• Connect your PC to the SMP Gateway CONSOLE port.
• Start SMP Loader.
• Put the SMP Gateway into Command mode.

To connect your PC to the SMP Gateway:

 Connect one of the communications ports of your PC to the SMP Gateway CONSOLE port,
using a standard RS-232 direct cable equipped with a DB9 male connector at one end and a
DB9 female connector at the other end.

Note: If you are using a portable computer that does not have an external serial port,
you will need to use an USB-to-RS-232 serial converter.

To start SMP Loader:

 Click Start on the Windows taskbar.
 Point to All Programs, then to Cooper Power Systems, and then to SMP Tools.
 From the SMP Tools menu, choose SMP Loader.
 From the Connection menu, choose Communication Settings to display the
Communication Settings window.

Most of the communication settings are unavailable, as they cannot be changed.

 Select the communications port that will be used on your PC (ex. COM1).
 Specify 115,200 bps as the file transfer speed. If your computer does not support the specified
speed, try a lower value for this setting.
 Click OK.
 Do not close SMP Loader: it will connect to the SMP Gateway automatically when the latter
will enter Command mode.

To put the SMP Gateway into Command mode, you need to reset the SMP Gateway. The
procedure differs, depending on the SMP gateway model.

To put an SMP 4 into Command mode:

 Insert a pointed object in the reset aperture and apply pressure until the watchdog timer LED
stops flashing.

SMP Loader will automatically connect to the SMP Gateway, as described in the previous
section.

Warning: Do not use a lead pencil, since lead is a conductor, as it could break and
damage the SMP 4.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 213

 To put an SMP 16 into Command mode:
 Power off the SMP 16.
 Power it up again.

SMP Loader will automatically connect to the SMP Gateway, as described in the previous
section.
In both cases, the SMP Loader window will show the files that are currently loaded on the
SMP Gateway as soon as the latter will complete its startup into Command mode.

26.2.2 Main Window

The SMP Loader main window is shown next, for an SMP 16/SG.

As you can see, the display only shows Windows CE. The same applies to an SMP 4. It is
important to note that the display area does not list the bootstrap programs, even though these do
indeed reside on the SMP Gateway. However, the secondary bootstrap version is shown at the
bottom right of the window, on the status bar.

To view the bootstrap programs’ version numbers:

 From the Connection menu, choose Bootstrap Versions.

A dialog box appears, showing the versions of both bootstrap programs.

Note: The dialog box indicates that the primary bootstrap version is unavailable since it
resides in the ROM and cannot be modified in the field.

26.2.3 Transferring Files to the SMP Gateway

You can transfer one or more files to the SMP Gateway, and you can choose the files individually.

To transfer files to the SMP Gateway:

 Using Windows Explorer, drag and drop the files in your SMP Loader main screen display.

OR
 In SMP Loader:

214 • Chapter 26: Miscellaneous SMP Tool Features

  Choose Send from the File menu.

 Point to SMP Tools\Version Pack\<version number>\SMP Firmware Libraries, and

then to the SMP 4, SMP 16 or SMP 16 PM folder, depending on the model of
SMP Gateway.
 Choose SMP Loader Files (*.vl) in the Files of type drop-down list. This will display
one or more files with the VL extension. Select the file you want to send, and click Open.

The File Information dialog box appears, giving you a description of each file, within
the .VL file, that you are about to transfer and asking you to confirm your intention to
carry out the transfer.

The transfer takes place once you have responded to the question for all the files that were listed in
the VL file, and a dialog box shows you the progress of the operation.
 Remove the cable that you connected between the SMP Gateway CONSOLE port and the PC
when you used SMP Loader.
 Start SMP Manager, and monitor the progress of the reset operation.

Notes:
• The SMP Gateway will not use the transferred files until next reset.
• If you transferred a bootstrap program, it will not appear in the list even though the file has
indeed been transferred. Furthermore, if you look at the bootstrap version numbers (by

SMP Gateway User Manual • 215

 choosing Bootstrap Versions from the Connection menu), you will see that the secondary
bootstrap number has not been updated. The version number will be updated on next reset of
the SMP Gateway.

26.2.4 Viewing the Log File

SMP Loader records every significant event until you exit the application, including startup, file
transfers, file deletions, requests for bootstrap programs version numbers, communications port
settings, transfer cancellations, refreshes, communication errors, and so on.
The log file, which can be read using Notepad, is located in the following folder, under the name
Loader.log:

SMP Tools\Version Pack\<version number>\Manager\SMP Firmware

Libraries

Note: Each time you start the application, SMP Loader overwrites the information
contained in the file.

26.2.5 Updating Bootstraps under Unusual Circumstances

Unexpected events, such as a blackout during a bootstrap program file transfer, could cause the
secondary bootstrap program to become corrupted.
If the secondary bootstrap of your SMP Gateway is corrupted, contact Cooper Power Systems’
Technical Support (see “Getting Assistance”, page 2).

216 • Chapter 26: Miscellaneous SMP Tool Features

27 SMP Console Functions

Console access to the SMP Gateway provides you with a command line prompt for running tools
and low-level commands on the SMP Gateway. Console tools are gradually being replaced by
Windows-based tools.
However, if you feel more at ease with the command line interface, you can use the following
console commands:
• FirewallMgr (Firewall Manager)
• Time and Date.
• TCP/IP address and RAS setup, as described in the installation manual of each device.
• SnmpMgr (SNMP Manager), as described in the “Configuring the SNMP Server” section,
page 177.
• ClockMgr (Clock Manager).

27.1 Starting SMP Console

All the aforementioned commands can be called on the SMP Console command line.

To start SMP Console:

 In SMP Manager, select your SMP Gateway.
 From the Tools menu, choose SMP Console.
 In the console window, type the username and password of a user account that has the System
Management privilege.
You can now execute any of the console commands that are described in the following sections.

27.2 Firewall Manager

Since version 4 of the SMP Gateway Software & Tools, the firewall is configured using
SMP Config. Firewall Manager can now only be used to view the current status and custom rules
of the firewall.
If you have setup a firewall using a previous version of the SMP Gateway software, you can still
use Firewall Manager to set up rules. However, these rules will be overridden if you set up a
firewall instance using SMP Config (see “Configuring the Integrated Firewall”, page 98).

Note: To use Firewall Manager, the user must have the System Management privilege
for the SMP Gateway.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 217

 To use Firewall Manager:
 In the console window, type the following command at the prompt:

firewallmgr

Firewall Manager displays the list of available commands, as the following shows:
Firewall Manager.

Available commands (case insensitive):

Note: Use "SMP Config" to change the firewall configuration.

R Show custom firewall rules.

S Show the current firewall and VPN status.
H Display the list of available commands.
Q Quit.

The commands are described in the following sections.

27.2.1 R Command
The R command displays the list of firewall rules you have set-up.

27.2.2 S Command
The S command shows the current status of the firewall and VPN connections.

Example:
Firewall: disable
Firewall log: enable
VPN connections: 2

27.2.3 H Command
The H command displays the list of available commands, as shown at the beginning of this section.

27.2.4 Q Command
The Q command is used to exit the firewall manager.

27.3 Time and Date

You can now set the SMP Gateway date and time using SMP Manager, as described in the
“Setting the SMP Gateway Internal Clock” section, page 179. But the Time and Date console
commands are still available for that matter.

218 • Chapter 27: SMP Console Functions

 To set the SMP Gateway time:
 In the console window, type the following command at the prompt:

time
The current UTC time is displayed, followed by a prompt for the new time. For example:

The current time is: 3:22:40 PM

Enter the new time (hh:mm:ss):

 Type the new UTC time in the requested format and press ENTER.

To set the SMP Gateway date:

 In the console window, type the following command at the prompt:

date
The current time is displayed, followed by a prompt for the new time. For example:

The current date is: Tuesday, June 10, 2008

Enter the new date (mm-dd-[yy]yy):

 Type the new date in the requested format (year can be specified using two digits) and press
ENTER.

Note: For both commands, the time/data will remain unchanged if you do not type
anything and press ENTER.

27.4 Clock Manager

Clock Manager was used for time adjustment setup. It has been replaced by SMP Config since
version 4 of the SMP Gateway Software & Tools. It is now mainly used to get an overview of the
GPS clock settings; for more details, refer to the SMP 16 GPS clock option installation manual.

To use Clock Manager:

 In the console window, type the following command at the prompt:

clockmgr

Clock Manager displays the list of available commands, as the following shows:
Clock Manager.

Available commands (case insensitive):

Note: Use "SMP Config" to change the clock configuration.

D Display the current settings.

H Display the list of available commands.
Q Quit.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 219

 The commands are described in the following sections.

27.4.1 D Command
The D command shows the current settings of the optional GPS clock.

Example:
GPS Cable length: 0 m
IRIG-B distribution format for the GPS: IRIG-BXX0 IEEE 1344
Always distribute the IRIG-B signal: No

27.4.2 H Command
The H command displays the list of available commands, as shown at the beginning of this section.

27.4.3 Q Command
The Q command is used to exit the clock manager.

27.5 Elo Touchscreen Driver Manager

If you use a touch screen with your SMP Gateway, you may no longer be able to reset the
calibration settings via the touch screen itself. At runtime, you can use the Elo Touchscreen Driver
Manager for this matter.

To enter the touch screen calibration mode:

 In the console window, type the following command at the prompt:

elomgr.exe /c
To learn how to recalibrate the touch screen, see “Calibrating the Touch Screen”, page 147.

220 • Chapter 27: SMP Console Functions

28 Troubleshooting

The SMP Gateway is a highly reliable substation-grade device. Most operational problems result
from configuration errors, and there are a few simple steps you can take to identify and solve
these problems.
This section discusses the following types of problems:
• Startup problems.
• Communications problems.
• Problems with data validity.
• Problems executing control operations.
• Firewall-related problems.

28.1 Getting Additional Help

There are a number information sources that can help you solve your problems. You can turn to
our Website - www.cooperpower.com, to find answers to frequently asked questions (FAQ).
Also, if your problem seems to be related to a protocol instance, you can refer to the Cooper
Power Systems documentation for the particular protocol.

To access a document:
 Click Start on Windows’ taskbar.
 Point to All Programs, then Cooper Power Systems, then SMP Tools, and then
Documentation.
 From the Documentation menu, choose Protocols.

The list of available documents is displayed in a Windows Explorer window.

 Click the document you want to read.
 From the File menu of the Explorer window, choose Open with Adobe Reader (or Adobe
Acrobat Reader, depending on the version installed).

Your Adobe Reader program starts up and displays the document in a window.

28.2 Creating an SMP Gateway Report File

In the upcoming sections, we will take you through the steps required to solve your problems.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 221

 If after going through all the required procedures, you find that you need to contact Cooper Power
Systems’ Technical Support, you will need to create a report file. This file will help the technical
support team in identifying and solving the problem.
SMP Gateway report files are stored in Reports folder of SMP Manager. Each time a report is
generated, SMP Manager creates an event log file, indicating all operations performed during the
report generation. The event log file is also stored in the Reports folder.

To create an SMP Gateway report file:

 In SMP Manager, select all SMP Gateways for which you want to create a report file (one
report per gateway).
 From the Gateway menu, choose Make Report.

Note: The Make Report command is only available if the selected SMP Gateways are
online.

 Click the Tell me more button to display the information that will be collected from the
SMP Gateways;
 Type additional information in the text box, such as the problem description, or the reason
why you are requesting technical support.
 The syntax of the name of each report file is as follows:

<label><name><serial><datetime>

where:
 <label> is an optional label that you can specify in the corresponding box;
 <name> is the name of the SMP Gateway as specified in SMP Manager;
 <serial> is the serial number of the SMP Gateway;
 and <date time> is the current date and time.

222 • Chapter 28: Troubleshooting

  Select Extract Automatically if you want to see where the report is located as soon as SMP
Manager has finished retrieving the report information. The information will be displayed in a
Windows Explorer window.
 Click OK.
 In the Browse for Folder window, select the folder where you want to save the report files.
 Click OK to start the report generation.

SMP Gateway Report progress windows appear (one for each report/gateway), showing
each operation performed and when report generation is complete.
 Once report generation is complete, you can click Details to display the event log for this
specific report generation (useful if errors occurred during the process), or simply click Close
to exit the SMP Gateway Report window.

If you selected Extract Automatically, the entire file content of the report will be shown in a
Windows Explorer window, providing information about the data points, crashes, logs, and so
on.
 The report is saved as GRF file, which is in fact a zipped file that contains the files and
folders discussed above.

Note: The Extract Automatically option actually shows the content of the GRF file. A
quick way to reach the GRF file is to move one folder up from that location.

28.2.1 Viewing an SMP Gateway Report File

At the time you generate a report, you can choose to see the report immediately. However, at all
times, you can view an existing report for any SMP Gateway.

To view an SMP Gateway report file:

 In SMP Manager, select the SMP Gateway.
 From the File menu, choose Extract SMP Gateway Report.
 In the Open dialog box, choose the desired GRF file and click Open.

A Windows Explorer window opens.

 You will now see a group of files and folders. Open the desired items to view the information
they contain.

28.3 Restoring the Factory Settings of the

SMP Gateway
When the SMP Gateway becomes unresponsive (even following multiple restart operations) or
when you forgot the administrator account password, there is no choice but to restore the factory
settings of the SMP Gateway. This operation is also simply called “Factory Reset”.

Note: It is also recommended to perform a factory reset operation when you need to
downgrade the SMP Gateway to an earlier version of the SMP Gateway
software.

A factory reset operation erases all the sensitive content of the SMP Gateway non-volatile
memory, including:

SMP Gateway User Manual • 223

 • the SMP Gateway application and related components;
• all SMP Gateway configuration (PAR) files;
• the content of all log folders;
• the SMP Gateway local security database;
• event files stored in local system folders;
• the SMP Gateway SoftPLC application, if CoDeSys is used with this SMP Gateway.

Note: The factory reset operation does not delete the bootstrap program and the
Windows CE operating system files. Network adapter settings (notably the
TCP/IP address of the SMP Gateway) are also preserved, except for the
SMP 4/DP.

To learn how to restore the factory settings of the SMP Gateway, refer to the “Troubleshooting”
section of the corresponding installation guide (ex. SMP 4/DP Installation Guide, for the
SMP 4/DP).

28.4 Startup Problems

When you start the SMP Gateway or reset it using SMP Manager, it goes through a sequence of
steps, after which you should see Started in the Status column of SMP Manager application
window. However, if the SMP Gateway software detects a problem during startup, you may see
something else in the Status column. Here are some suggestions for troubleshooting the problem.
If the problem persists, do not hesitate to contact our technical support team.

28.4.1 No Configuration File

If the status is No configuration file, you have not loaded a configuration file on the
SMP Gateway.

To correct the problem:

 Create a configuration file using SMP Config, if you have not already done so.
 Use SMP Manager to send the file to the SMP Gateway.
 Restart the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager, in order to activate the configuration.

28.4.2 Protocols Failed

If the status is Protocols failed, it may be due to one of the following reasons:
• You changed the SMP Gateway license, but did not update the SMP Gateway application.
• There is a problem with a master or slave protocol instance.
• There is an incompatibility in the settings.

To correct the problem:

 If you have changed the SMP Gateway license without updating your SMP Gateway
application, update the SMP Gateway application using SMP Manager, as some components
may be missing. See “Updating the SMP Gateway Application”, page 206.
 Otherwise, start SMP Log and examine the startup log.
 Make sure you are using the correct configuration file:

224 • Chapter 28: Troubleshooting

  If you are using the wrong configuration file, use SMP Manager to send the correct file
to the SMP Gateway.
 If you are using the correct configuration file, but it contains errors, fix them all using
SMP Config, and then send the file to the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager.
 Make sure you have described your hardware correctly.
For example, you may have specified the wrong SMP Gateway model in SMP Config.
 Check the protocol settings.
The log will show you the startup actions of each protocol instance. You will see which
one failed to load or did not start up properly. Check its parameter settings. Make sure
you have associated the protocol instance with an existing serial port (the number of
available ports depends on the hardware configuration settings).
 Check the version numbers of the SMP Gateway software.
A component may not be up-to-date:
 Send an updated version of the SMP Gateway application to the SMP Gateway,
using SMP Manager.
 If the application update does not work, you probably need to have SMP Config
convert your configuration file, after which you can send the file to the
SMP Gateway.
 If the problem persists after the SMP Gateway has restarted, try using a reduced version of
the configuration file, in an attempt to isolate the problem. For example, use a configuration
file that has only one device and one protocol instance.

28.4.3 Critical Components Missing

If the status is Critical components missing, there is a missing component in the SMP Gateway
application. This situation can arise if you change your license without updating the
SMP Gateway application.
 Update the SMP Gateway application using SMP Manager. See “Updating the SMP Gateway
Application”, page 206.
 If the problem persists, contact Cooper Power Systems’ Technical Support.

28.5 Communications Problems

Communications problems always occur in one of the following layers:

SMP Gateway User Manual • 225

 Figure 28-1 Network layers where most communication problems occur

SMP Trace and SMP Stats are the ideal tools for you to troubleshoot a communications problem
and determine in which layer the problem occurred. SMP Trace shows you the information that
was sent back and forth between the SMP Gateway and the device, while SMP Stats supplies you
with statistics that can help you detect an anomaly. For example, the statistics may show you that
there were no exchanges whatsoever on a particular connection, or the trace may show you that
the SMP Gateway never got responses when it polled a particular device.

28.5.1 Physical Layer

The physical connection between the SMP Gateway and a device is often at the root of a problem.
You should therefore ask yourself the following questions:
• Am I using the correct type of cable?
Do I need to use a cable for RS-232 or for RS-485 communications?
Should I be using a 2-wire or a 4-wire cable for RS-485 communications?
• Is the device connected properly?
Make sure the cable is connected to the correct port.
• Do I need an adaptor?
For example, do I need a null-modem adapter for RS-232 communications?
• Are the connection settings configured correctly?
Use SMP Config to check the Asynchronous Serial Ports settings, under Connections:
• If I’m using RS-485 4-wire or 2-wire, did I choose RS-485?

28.5.2 Link Layer

Problems in the link layer are often related to the settings of the communications component.
Here are examples of settings that can cause problems:
• The baud rate, parity, start and stop bit settings of both the SMP Gateway and the device, for
serial communications.
• The TCP/IP address and port configuration, for TCP/IP communications.

226 • Chapter 28: Troubleshooting

 To correct this problem:
 Examine the link layer byte exchanges, using SMP Trace and SMP Stats.
 Using SMP Config, look at the Connections settings:
 If your SMP Gateway communicates with the device over a serial link, check the
communications settings of the link used to communicate with the device, such as baud
rate and parity. These settings must be configured identically at both ends.
 If your SMP Gateway communicates with the device over a WAN or LAN, make sure
you have specified the correct TCP/IP address and port number.

28.5.3 Protocol Layer

Protocol problems are directly related to the settings of the protocol instance used to
communicate with the device.
You should proceed as follows:
 Examine the protocol layer byte exchanges, using SMP Trace and SMP Stats.
 Using SMP Config, make sure you have specified the correct protocol.
 Look at the SMP Config general settings:
 Check the settings of the protocol instance, such as packet size.
 Make sure the device or link address is correct.
 Check the polling parameters.
Some devices are not able to respond to rapid polling requests because they process the
information very slowly. Other devices only allow slow communications links - 9600
baud or less. If you poll too quickly, the request will arrive before the last block of data is
read, thereby causing communications problems.

28.6 Problems with Data Validity

When all the exchanges are taking place correctly and there are no protocol errors reported in the
statistics, but some of the acquired values are erroneous or incoherent:
 Using SMP Config, examine the following settings for the points that are invalid:
• Data point address.
Is the address of the physical data point correct? Some devices have flexible
configuration options, so you have to compare the SMP Config values with the values set
by the device manufacturer’s software.
• Conversion factors.
For physical analog data points, are the scale and offset factors correct?
• Polarity.
For physical binary input points, is the polarity set correctly?
• Warning messages.
Are there any warning messages in the message pane, regarding the data points that have
erroneous values?

28.7 Problems Executing a Control Operation

When a control operation fails:

SMP Gateway User Manual • 227

  Use SMP Log to look in the Control log.
All control operations are recorded in this log.
 Use SMP Trace to see the data exchanges.
Note, however, that you have to be connected to the SMP Gateway to view a control
operation in real time.
 Make the following checks to determine the cause of the failure:
 Using SMP Log, look at the control log and make sure the SCADA is sending the correct
sequence (direct operate, select before operate) of messages.
 Using SMP Config, check the general settings of both the master and the slave protocol
instances. Make sure each that for each of them, the Control Enabled check box is
selected.
 Using SMP Config, make sure the binary and analog physical output points are set up
correctly. For example, for the DNP3 protocol, Control Type requires a value other than
“Not supported”. See the device manufacturer’s documentation for the required setup and
refer to the appropriate Cooper Power Systems protocol documentation.
 Refer to the device manufacturer’s documentation to check whether the device allows for
a polling message to be sent between a select operation and an operate operation, or
whether polling has to wait until after the select and operate have completed. Some
manufacturers deselect the device if a polling message is sent between a select operation
and an operate operation. If polling has to wait, use SMP Config to make sure that the Tx
During SBO check box is selected in the master protocol general parameters.
 Using the Web browser, make sure the point called _smp___localControl is set either to
0 to enable commands from the SCADA or to 1, to enable commands from Visual T&D.
If the value is not set properly, send either an open command to the point called
_smp___setLocalControl to set the value to 0, or a close command to set the value to 1.
 Using the Web browser, check whether the point is set to inhibit operations. If so,
remove the inhibition.

28.8 Firewall-Related Problems

28.8.1 Recovering from a Firewall Lockout
If, for some reasons, access to the SMP Gateway management port (TCP 6650) is restricted in the
integrated firewall, you may no longer be able to connect to the SMP Gateway using any
SMP Tools: this situation is called a “firewall lockout”.
Since the firewall configuration is specified in the SMP Gateway configuration file (PAR), it is
possible to recover from a firewall account if you have physical access to the SMP Gateway, to
force the SMP Gateway to reset and enter the maximum safe mode, where the restrictions over the
SMP Gateway management port are not effective.

To recover from a firewall lockout:

• Power off the SMP Gateway, and then power it up again.
• Pay attention to the various traces that appear in the terminal window. Eventually, the
following prompt appears:

********************************************
Press ENTER now to access configuration mode

228 • Chapter 28: Troubleshooting

 ********************************************
The SMP Gateway will start in 15 seconds...
• Press ENTER before the end of the 15-second period.

Note: If local authentication is enabled on the SMP Gateway, a login prompt will be
displayed. Enter a valid login name, followed by the corresponding password.

The SMP Gateway enters the configuration mode and the following appears on the terminal
window:
***************************
Starting configuration mode
***************************

Current UTC time: 2009/05/28 17:14:55

Available commands:
S Set the clock
C Configure TCP/IP parameters
U Update the firmware
F Reset the SMP Gateway configuration to the factory
default
D Start on-line diagnostics
M Start the SMP Gateway in MAX SAFE MODE
W Start the SMP Gateway
Note. The SMP Gateway will start after 60 seconds if you have
not pressed any key.

>
 Type M to restart the SMP Gateway in Maximum Safe Mode.

The SMP Gateway will restart and it should now be accessible via SMP Manager.
 If you do not have a copy of the configuration file, retrieve it from the SMP Gateway.
 Start SMP Config.
 Remove or modify the settings and/or access rules that restrict access to the SMP Gateway
management port (TCP 6650).
 Save the configuration file.
 Upload the configuration file to the SMP Gateway.
 Restart the SMP Gateway in Normal mode.

The SMP Gateway should now be working properly and should be accessible via all
SMP Tools.

SMP Gateway User Manual • 229

29 Appendices

SMP Gateway User Manual • 231

Appendix A - System Data Points

The SMP Gateway has system points for various purposes and features, such as remote access,
security, time adjustment and redundancy. When they are present on an SMP Gateway, they can
be seen using the SMP Gateway Web server. When an SMP Gateway slave protocol subscribes to
them, they provide useful information to the SCADA.
The following list describes all available system data points:

Data Point Name Description

Power Status

_smp___voltage_ok If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the voltage of the SMP Gateway
power supply is within its normal range of operation.

Temperature

_smp___temperature This analog input point states the temperature, in °C, inside the gateway.
(available on SMP 16/SP)

Clock-Related Information

_smp___clockYear This analog input point states the year information of the SMP Gateway internal
clock.

_smp___clockMonth This analog input point states the month information of the SMP Gateway internal
clock.

_smp___clockDay This analog input point states the day information of the SMP Gateway internal
clock.

_smp___clockHour This analog input point states the hour information of the SMP Gateway internal
clock, using the 24-hour notation.

_smp___clockMinute This analog input point states the minute information of the SMP Gateway internal
clock.

_smp___clockSecond This analog input point states the second information of the SMP Gateway internal
clock.

_smp___clockSynchronized If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the internal clock of the
SMP Gateway is actually synchronized with an external time source, such as GPS or
IRIG-B.

SMP Gateway User Manual • A-1

 Data Point Name Description

_smp___battery_ok If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the clock battery is operational.
(available on SMP 4 and
SMP 4/DP)

Local Control

_smp___setLocalControl This binary output point allows you to switch from local control (by a local HMI,
such as Visual T&D), to remote control (by the SCADA). _smp___localControl
indicates the current control state of the SMP Gateway.

_smp___localControl If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the SMP Gateway is actually
controlled locally, by Visual T&D or the SMP Gateway HMI. If the gateway is
currently controlled by the SCADA, this point is set to 0.
When the SMP Gateway starts up for the first time, this point is set to 0. The value of
this point is persisted, i.e. its value is stored in non-volatile memory and is not reset
to 0 when the SMP Gateway restarts.

_smp___restartSystem This binary output point allows you to restart the SMP Gateway.

_smp___setNOrelay This binary output point allows you to open and close the SMP Gateway normally
(available on SMP 16) open (NO) relay. _smp___stateNOrelay indicates the actual state of the relay.

_smp___stateNOrelay This binary input point indicates the actual state of the SMP Gateway normally open
(available on SMP 16) (NO) relay. If set to 1, the relay is closed.

Security

_smp___securityAccountLocked This binary input point shows if there is an account locked on the SMP Gateway.

_smp___securityLogonFailureCount This analog input point states the number of unsuccessful user logon attempts.

_smp___securityLogonFailure This binary input point indicates if a user logon attempt failed since last
_smp___secLogFailCnt counter reset.

_smp___securityLogonFailureCount This binary output point allows you to reset the _smp___secLogFailCnt analog input
Reset point to 0. It also resets the _smp___secLogFail binary input point to 0.

Remote Access

_smp___dialupEnable This binary output point allows you to accept or block all incoming RAS dialup
connections to the SMP Gateway. Set it to 1 to accept all incoming RAS dialup
connections. _smp__dialupEnabled indicates the resulting state.

_smp___dialupEnabled This binary input point indicates if all incoming RAS dialup connections to the
SMP Gateway are accepted of blocked. If set to 1, all connections are accepted.

_smp___dialupInUse This binary input point indicates whether or not there is actually communication in
progress via an incoming RAS dialup connection.

A-2 • Appendix A - System Data Points

 Data Point Name Description

Passthrough
(for each passthrough connection named “<connection>”)

_smp___<connection>Enable This binary output point allows you to lock or unlock the passthrough connection.
Set it to 0 to lock the connection. _smp___<connection>Enabled indicates if the
connection is locked or not.

_smp___<connection>Enabled This binary input point indicates the passthrough connection lock state. If set to 0,
the connection is locked and cannot be used.

_smp___<connection>InUse If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the passthrough connection is
currently active.

System Folders
(for each system folder named <folder name>)

_smp___Folder<id><folder name>_ If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the system folder is available to the
Available SMP Gateway.

_smp___Folder<id><folder name>_ This analog input point states the amount of disk space that is available on the host of
FreeDiskSpace the system folder.

_smp___Folder<id><folder name>_ If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the system folder host is running low
LowDiskSpace on disk space.

Redundancy

_smp___rsLocal_ok If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the SMP Gateway is currently
operational.
This point is mirrored in the _smp___rsRemote_ok binary input point of the other
SMP Gateway of the group.

_smp___rsRemote_ok If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the other SMP Gateway of the group
is currently operational.
This point is mirrored in the _smp___rsLocal_ok binary input point of the other
SMP Gateway.

_smp___rsLocal_active If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the SMP Gateway is active.
If set to 0, it indicates that the SMP Gateway is on standby.

_smp___rsRemote_standby If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the other SMP Gateway of the group
is on standby.
If set to 0, it indicates that the other SMP Gateway of the group is active.

_smp___rsRemote_hotStandby If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the other SMP Gateway of the group
is on hot standby.
For more information about Hot-Standby, refer to the “Hot Standby” section,
page 174.

_smp___rsFirstConnection_ok If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the first link between the redundant
SMP Gateways is operational.

SMP Gateway User Manual • A-3

 Data Point Name Description

_smp___rsSecondConnection_ok If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the second link between the
redundant SMP Gateways is operational.

_smp___rsSynchronized If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the RTDX databases of both
SMP Gateways of a group are synchronized.

_smp___rsLan_ok If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that SMP Gateway access to the LAN is
operational. This point state can be used as a failover condition.

_smp___rsVoltage_ok If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the voltage of the SMP Gateway
power supply is within its normal range of operation. This point state can be used as
a failover condition.

_smp___rsTemp_ok If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the internal temperature of the
SMP Gateway is within an acceptable range. This point state can be used as a
failover condition.

_smp___rsMem_ok If set to 0, this binary input point indicates that the SMP Gateway is running low on
memory. This point state can be used as a failover condition.

_smp___rsGroupAddress_ok If set to 0, this binary input point indicates that the public IP address defined for the
group conflicts with another device that uses the same address. This point state can
be used as a failover condition.

_smp___rsGatewayA If set to 1, this binary input indicates that this is the SMP Gateway A of the
redundancy group.
If set to 0, it indicates that this is the SMP Gateway B of the group.

Soft PLC

_smp___plcProgramRunning If set to 1, the binary input point indicates that a Soft PLC automation script is
currently running on the SMP Gateway.

Annunciator

_annunciator___alarmActiveCount This analog input point states the number of active alarms.

_annunciator___alarmBlockedCount This analog input point states the number of blocked alarms.

_annunciator___alarmConfigCount This analog input point states the number of data points configured to trigger alarms.

_annunciator___alarmToAckCount This analog input point states the number of alarms that require acknowledgment.

_annunciator___alarmToClearCount This analog input point states the number of alarms that have been acknowledge and
that may be cleared.

_annunciator___generalAlarm If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that at least one alarm is currently active.

Table A-1 System data points

A-4 • Appendix A - System Data Points

Appendix B - RTDX Status Flags

Each data point value that is stored in the real-time database (RTDX) of an SMP Gateway is
tagged with a quality attribute called “RTDX status”. This attribute gives additional information
about the precision of the value, the state of the IED that provided the value or the quality of the
corresponding timestamp.
The RTDX status attribute consists in a 16-bit value divided into flags. The 12 less significant bits
are used to define the quality of the value, while the 4 most significant bits define the quality of
the corresponding timestamp. Each status bit (flag) is independent of the others (except for the
timestamp status flags), which means that a given value can be tagged with more than one status
flags at the time.
The following table presents the RTDX status flags that are currently supported by the
SMP Gateway software and tools:

RTDX Status Flag Value Description

OK / Good 0x0000 Indicates that the value is valid.

Unknown 0x0001 Indicates that the corresponding data point exists within
RTDX, but that it was never updated by a master or system
component.

Restart 0x0002 Indicates that either the originating IED or some other device
along the reporting path is currently being restarted. This
implies that no valid status was retrieved for the
corresponding data point since the last SMP Gateway reset.
Note: This status flag is DNP3-specific.

Communication failure 0x0004 Indicates that the connection with the originating IED is
currently lost, which implies that the value that is stored in
RTDX for the corresponding data point is the last reported
value.

Forced 0x0008 Indicates that the reported value was not retrieved through
normal acquisition or by exception, but was forced by a
human operator or by some automated process to provide “to
the best of our knowledge” type information with no other
guarantee.

Bad hardware 0x0010 Indicates that the reported value is of a doubtful nature due to
known hardware problems. The value might be valid, but
cannot be guaranteed.

SMP Gateway User Manual • B-1

 Over range 0x0020 Indicates that the reported value is outside its normal range.
This may be a direct indication from the D/A converter, or
from a software component that detected that the value has
reached its maximum possible value (positive or negative).
Note: This status flag is reserved for analog input and output
points.

Bad reference 0x0040 Indicates that the reported value provides from an analog
acquisition chain containing at least one invalid reference
channel. Best case is that the reported value is valid, but not
accurate.
Note: This status flag is reserved for analog input and output
points.

Reserved 0x0080 Reserved for internal use.

Inhibited 0x0100 Indicates that the corresponding data point was logically
inhibited by a human operator or an automation process.
An inhibited input point will no longer be reported, as long as
it remains inhibited, and the current value is the last one that
was reported prior to the inhibition.
An inhibited output point cannot be operated, as long as it
remains inhibited.

Out of range. 0x0200 Indicates that the value is outside an expected range of values
based on intrinsic hardware limitations.
For example, consider a sensor that produces a ±4 V signal,
although the actual limitation of the hardware is ±5 V. No
status flag would be raised for a 3.9 V value; however, a
4.1 V value would raise the “Out of range” flag, while a 5.0 V
value would raise both the “Out of range” and “Over range”
status flags.
An out-of-range value should be considered with caution,
since this is an abnormal condition that usually points to a
sensor defect or a physical installation issue.
Note 1: This status flag should be confused with alarm and
warning threshold that may be defined by users and
operators. Based on the example above, the user may
decide that any value larger than 3.0 V should trigger an
alarm. That does not necessarily means that the value is
incorrect, but that the operators should have a closer look
to the originating device.
Note 2: This status flag is reserved for analog input and output
points.

Simulated 0x0400 Indicates that the reported value was not retrieved through
normal acquisition or by exception, but was simulated by a
human operator using the Commissioning tool.
This status flag is similar to the Forced status flag, although
simulated values cannot be persisted, which means that they
will not be preserved when the SMP Gateway restarts, even if
persistence is configured for the corresponding data points.

Real-time clock (RTC) 0x2000 Indicates that the SMP Gateway provided the timestamp of
the value.

B-2 • Appendix B - RTDX Status Flags

 Device time 0xC000 Indicates that the timestamp was reported by the IED along
with the value. It is assumed that the IED clock is properly
synchronized with a reliable time source, and no guarantee is
provided in regards to the synchronization of the IED and
SMP Gateway clocks.

Table B-1 RTDX status flags

SMP Gateway User Manual • B-3